Home

ManageEngine Support Center Plus

1. Parameter Value Description account string Account name of the contact product string Product for which the request is raised string Product Type of the product productType status string Status of the request Can be Open Closed Onhold or any other configured status level string Denotes the complexity of the request priority string Denotes the priority importance of the request mode string Mode through which the request was raised group string Group to which the request was assigned supportRep _ string Support Rep assigned to the request subject string Subject of the request string Business Unit businessUnit today yesterday this_ week Created date and time of the createdDurin last week this_ month request g last_month today yesterday this_week Due by date and time of the request dueByDuring last_week this_month last_month today yesterday this week Completed date and time of the ompletedDur last_week this_ month request ing last_month count Denotes the number of requests to be displayed countFrom Denotes the number from which the request should be displayed NOTE Please note that while performing a getRequest operation either the Request ID Email of the contact or name of the Account should be specified In addition you can also conduct a search using keywords Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters
2. banne Contacts WITT Ces E G H T 3 Ki EJ M NW Resi pncile Contacts Select Account vi Ag select box 10 per page Y mail Phone Edit Q B bte nauk com 88888 Name urt amp ox com 231232454 Email jark acme com 1 925 924 9800 Phone jeg acme com 67293202 Account Sub Acct ike acme com 234 675 8787 E Mobile aul acme com 234 678 8787 Naron acme com 925 852 2588 haronp acme com 983 788 347 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save 4 To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Click Save Only the selected columns are added in the request list view Any Additional fields added for the contact will also be displayed in the column list view You can also sort the list view in ascending or descending order Clicking it once sorts it in ascending order Clicking twice sorts the column in descending order ZOHO Corporation 198 pe ee pa New Contact Delete Reconcile Contacts oO O O al LI O d L al Name 4 ES Kate only ES Kurt Rusell ES Mark Adams ES Meg Ryan E Mike Smith ES Paul Finch SS Sharon Harper ES Sharon Philips ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide a Email kate nauk com kurt xxx com mark acme com meg acme com m
3. ZOHO Corporation 289 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Edit Survey Questions 1 2 3 4 Click on Questions tab Click on the Edit link beside the question you wish to edit Edit the question displayed in the text area Click Save The Define Survey page is refreshed to display the modifications made Delete Survey Questions 1 Click on Questions tab 2 Click Delete link beside the question you wish to delete A confirmation dialog pops up 3 Click Ok to delete the question Note Deleting a survey question will have an impact on the previously collected survey Si results Satisfaction Levels Add Satisfaction Levels 1 Click on Satisfaction Levels tab 2 Click Add Level button 3 Enter the satisfaction level in the text area provided 4 Click Save You can add any number of satisfaction level to the survey by following the above steps As you keep adding the levels it gets appended at the end of the level list You can change the order of the satisfaction levels by clicking the Move Up and Move Down link available beside each question Satisfaction levels scales from bad to good with Good at the bottom and Bad at the top Edit Satisfaction Level Click on Satisfaction Levels tab Click on the Edit link beside the satisfaction level you wish to edit Edit the satisfaction level displayed in the text area e EE Fi E Click Save The page refresh
4. ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Closing Requests When the contact is completely satisfied that his her request has been completely attended to and the reported problem has been resolved by the support rep then the request can be closed by the support rep On closing the request a survey form is sent to the contact to rate customer satisfaction You can also close a request without sending the survey using Close without Notification option To know more on how to define s survey refer Survey To close completed request 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on Subject link of the request to be closed 3 From request details page click Close drop down menu gt select Close option 4 If you have enabled the option to send survey on completion of request a survey form is sent to the contact via mail Alternatively you can also change the status field to Closed while editing the request Refer Editing Request to know more You can reopen a request from the closed state To do this open the closed request in editable mode and change the status field from Closed to Open The completed date is removed on reopening the request When this request is finally closed the completed date is updated and the Time taken to close is recalculated taking the reopened period into account To close more than one request You can close all the completed req
5. ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus D Admin Guide Lem aiaga SupportCenter Copyright 2010 ZOHO Corporation All rights reserved ManageEngine Support Center Plus Table of Contents INTRODUCTION iisisrnininannnrunansnnanannnannannnnananinnnnannananananinnannanananan 7 GETTING SL EK eeg eg ege eege Eege eege Eege EE Ee EE EE EE Eege ER EE 9 S pportCenter Plus HEEN 10 Importing Support Reps from Active Director 11 Importing e gett ET EE 13 Registering SupportCenter Plus 15 Configuring Business UNITS dag es egte cin gen des Ae Sage EA dd 17 Customer Portal Ze en ge eege oxdinaetrencaidinaneescesborideeneesdaseweuses EN HOME PAGE ZaneeeEgekRERERERNREEERRRKEEENEREEEERNKEE anadai ER Ee ER REES eng 23 License Expiry Alert EE 26 Dashboard E 27 Log a Call rraian iaa Ea AAA A EES E GEN 30 EE 32 Publishing Announcements eee ence teen eee eee cece eee eee eee neeeeeeees 34 Gu lat 37 Preferences scaxeie access nated elesae E R a a ET 41 Feed Dack EE 43 ACTIVITI ES sissscsscsnsncnscavansnsnincncnandcncsnincnenanaccsanananananasanenenananans 44 Activities et ViIGW oi axceechtwssuetavauna EA a a 45 Viewing Activities based on Filter 47 Customizing Activities List VIEW 2 SNE SEENEN NEEN NS NENNEN 48 Searching Tasks and En e 49 Adding New EE 50 Viewing EE 52 Creating New Events ssssssssrrrrrnrrrrrtssstttrrrtrrrrrnnnrranaastrreeerrrrrnnnnna 54 Viewing EVERS E 57 REQUESTS zegensgggegeEagEegesgEES
6. ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Computer Telephony Integration CTI ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus is slowly emerging as a full fledged customer support and help desk software on facilitating Computer Telephony Integration CTI supported on Asterisk server With CTI in SupportCenter Plus your help desk centers becomes instantly efficient and productive saving time and effort in replying to mails By just a single click to call customers Click to Dial and Screen Pop up displaying the incoming caller s record your help desk software fulfills almost all your needs Note Please note that a separate licence should be purchased to enable CTI in SupportCenter Plus Features of CTI in SupportCenter Plus e Screen pop up displaying the caller information along with history of previous requests thus saving time and effort in database lookup e Click to dial option to call customers instantly Getting Started On purchasing the CTI license the following needs to be configured to get started with SupportCenter Plus CTI e Telephony Server Settings e Call Alert option under Support Reps Telephony Server Settings The details of the server such as the server name and port number should be configured to enable CTI Currently SupportCenter Plus supports Asterisk and Avaya server 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click General Settings tab gt select Telephony Server Settings icon ry und
7. Q reset the admin password Search Browse by Topics v Cancel Copy to 0 Oof0 25 per page e resolution g Subject Topic Name Views Created On Public Created By CO m No Solutions Available 4 Provide a search string in the Search text field and click Search or press Enter The solutions that match the search string is displayed ZOHO Corporation 108 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Submit For Approval If a request requires formal approval from the manager before you act upon it you can submit the request for approval using this option On submitting a request for approval an Approval tab appears in the request details page Your manager will receive a Request for Approval mail with a link to approve or reject the request To submit the request for approval 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to send for approval 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Submit for Approval option The Submit For Approval page Specify the To address This field is mandatory 5 If required you can edit the Subject and specify relevant subject text in the given field This field is also mandatory 6 Specify the relevant Description in the given text field The ApprovalLink is a variable and should be available in the mail to replace the variable with the link where you have the requ
8. Note If a request raised is resolved based on a particular contract then that contract EN cannot be deleted Edit Contracts You can edit contracts either from the list view or from the contracts details page To edit contracts from the list view 1 Click on the Contracts tab in the header pane to open the contract list view page 2 Select the Edit icon beside the contract you wish to edit The Edit Contract form opens with values populated while adding the contract 3 Edit the contract details and Update the changes To edit contracts from the contract details page 1 Click on the Contracts tab in the header pane to open the contract list view page Click on the Contract Name to be edited From the contract details page click the Edit button The Edit Contract form opens with values populated while adding the contract 4 Edit the contract details and Update the changes Delete Contracts 1 Click on the Contracts tab in the header pane to open the contract list view page Enable the check box beside the Contracts Name to be deleted Click on Delete A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears Click Yes to proceed The contracts is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 162 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Renew Contract You can renew a service contract once the active period has expired To renew a service contract The active period needs to be speci
9. To access the support plan configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click Support Plan icon Pas under the Contract Settings block The Support Plan list view page is displayed You can add edit and delete support plans as per your need Note 1 Operations such as Add Edit and Delete can be performed from the Support EN Plan list view 2 You can set any support plan as default from the list view Add Support Plan Click Add Support Plan link From the Support Plan form specify a unique name for the Support Plan in the Support Plan Name field This field is mandatory 3 Specify the Description for the support plan in the given text field Select type of support offered for the support plan say support based on incidents or the number of hours from Support Type field If the Support Type is Hour Based then specify the No of Hours Cost per Hour and the Total Cost in the provided fields If the Support Type is Incident Based specify the No of Incidents Cost per I ncident and the Total Cost 5 By default the list of all the services is available in Support Services block You can select the services offered for this Support Plan by selecting the check box beside them You can also add additional Support Service using Add New link 6 Click Save The new support plan is added to the already existing list 7 Setting a Default Support Plan The default supp
10. method status Success and Failure response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 ZOHO Corporation 311 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml getRequest status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getRequest status Failure statuscode 5003 statusmessage No contact with the specified email exists Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getRequest is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getRequest gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name email value Email ID of contact gt lt input type hidden name status value Status of the req
11. 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page 2 Click on the Subject link of the solution you wish to forward 3 From the Solutions details page click the Forward button The Solution Forward form pops up 4 Specify the To mail address in the given text field This field is mandatory 5 You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the mail address in CC field with comma as a separator 6 By default the Subject and Description fields are pre filled with the existing data If required you can edit the Subject and description 7 You can also attach relevant files to the solution from Attach File link 8 Click Send If you do not wish to forward the solution then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 139 Submit for Approval In order to view the solution in customer portal the solution needs to be sent for approval to the support reps with the permission to approve solutions Refer Configuring Roles To submit solutions for approval 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 From the solution filter select Solution Draft to view the list of solutions that need to be sent for approval 3 Click on the Subject link of the solution to be submitted for approval 4 From the solutions details page click on Actions drop down gt select Submit for Approval option The Submit for Approval form pops up Subm
12. 10 You can insert solutions directly into the application using Insert Solution link Select a Topic The corresponding solutions title under the topic is displayed Click Insert Solution link beside the specific topic The solution is added automatically as the message content 11 Click Attach File s button to add files as attachments to the mail 12 Click Send to send the mail to the concern support rep 13 You have an option to Save the request as draft The email saved as drafts can be viewed edited deleted and sent for review from the request details page as shown below ZOHO Corporation 119 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Requests gt View request Edit My Draft 29 Sep 2009 16 05 Send for review Delete Edit Close w Assign e Actions v Reply v ID 79 Iphone display is not working Created On Sep 29 2009 04 04 PM Contact 2 Sharon Harper Acme Corporations 925 852 2588 B 925 852 2592 2 Send Invite Status Open Priority High Due Date Sep 29 2009 05 04 PM Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry History 12 Click Save and Send the request for review if you wish to save the mail and send it for review to the concern authority Enter the mail address of the concern authority to review the reply in the To field ZOHO Corporation 120 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide SMS the Support Rep You can also
13. Administrator Guide Custom Views You can create your own customized page to display solutions using Custom View option You can specify the criteria to filter the solutions accumulated in your solution list view page Thus helping you to sort and view solutions based on your requirement e Create Custom View e Manage View Creating Custom View If you want to view all the solutions under General topic in the application through Custom View 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 Click on Create Custom View icon g The Add Custom View page opens Solutions gt All Solutions All Solutions v Views gt Recent Solutions All Solutions Approved Solutions Q Search Approval Pending Solut Solution Drafts Approve Actions Rejected Solutions 3 In the Add Custom View page specify a View Name like General topics solutions This field is mandatory 4 If you are the administrator and want this custom view to be available only when you log in select the check box beside Make this view as private custom view The custom view is made private By default the custom view for an administrator is public If you are a support rep without administrator login privilege then by default the created custom view is private The option to Make this view as private custom view is not available 5 In the Advance Filtering b
14. Contacts added or imported by the administrator are approved contacts by default These contacts are provided with customer portal login details and their requests are tracked periodically Apart from these contacts there are users who send request to SupportCenter Plus whose contact information is unavailable in the database These contacts are added under Unapproved Contact list in the application These requests are logged into the application based on the options selected under Contact auto addition configuration under Admin tab gt Settings Approving Unapproved Contacts Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contact list view page Click on Unapproved Contacts link under Views From the Unapproved Contact list view select the contacts to be approved by enabling the check box Click Approve 5 To approve the contacts and also provide customer portal login permission click Approve amp provide login button The selected contacts are listed under All contacts You can remove unapproved contacts by clicking on Delete button ZOHO Corporation 210 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Registered Contacts Registered contacts are similar to that of unapproved contacts except these contacts have registered for SupportCenter Plus through the Customer Portal On registering these contacts are listed under Registered Contacts from where the users have to be approved and prov
15. Importing Support Reps from Active Directory You can import all your support reps instantly if their details are configured in the Active Directory SupportCenter Plus allows you to enable Active Directory authentication to these support reps and also provide specific roles to execute definite tasks in the application You can find Import from Active Directory option under Admin gt Support Reps e Domain Name amp Domain Controller Domain name and Domain Controller from which the support reps need to be imported e Login Name amp Password Login Credentials to the domain e Select the fields to be imported from the active directory Import from Active Directory Import from Active Directory Please Note On Importing Existing data will be overwritten and New data will be added Mandatory Field Domain Name ACME wl Add New Domain Domain Controller acme Login Name administrator Password eecccccececce Select Fields for Import Phone Mobile Job title E mail Next Cancel On selecting the necessary Organizational Units OU and importing the support reps you need to enable Active Directory Authentication under Settings in the Admin module You can also schedule an Active Directory Import at regular intervals to synchronize the database information with the active directory If there are any modifications in the existing support rep information the data will be rewritten and updated in the application
16. ZOHO Corporation 11 Active Directory Settings Enable Active Directory Authentication Schedule Active Directory Import On enabling AD authentication the login name and password with its domain is validated in the AD after which the Support Rep can log into the application Alternatively you can also add support reps manually into the application using the Add New Support Rep link Refer Support Reps to know more on adding support reps manually ZOHO Corporation 12 Importing Accounts Contacts Once the support reps are successfully imported into the application the Accounts and the respective contacts information is imported either from e Microsoft Outlook or e CSV Import The Outlook edition can be installed on user s MS Outlook as a plugin which can be used to synchronize the contacts in between Microsoft Outlook and the SupportCenter Plus To know more on refer Import From Outlook Easy ways to add your Customer information D z OBES D gt 8 import from CSV To enable organizations to quickly populate the i customer database SupportCenter Plus provides an easy to use CSV import option to import all relevant information from your existing database e Import from Outlook E Schedule the CSV import SupportCenter Plus also provides a CSV based option to keep it s database in synch with your organization s customer database The Outlook edition can be installed as a Plugin on MS Outlo
17. e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 313 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Response response uri api xml addRequestDescriptio n status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml addRequestDescriptio n status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation addRequestDescription is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addRequestDescription gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Request ID of the request to view read the description gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt ZOHO Corporation 314 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding Notes for a request Through this
18. http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getAccount ZOHO Corporation 324 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Parameters The parameters that needs to be passed via HTTP method for viewing an account are as follows Parameter Value Description id string Account ID of the account to view account string Name of the account startswith string The first alphabetic letter of the account businessUnit string Business Unit NOTE Please note that either the id account name or starting alphabetic of the account is a mandatory field Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml getAccount status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 325 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Error Errors occur when the API Key is not v
19. som Sep 27 2010 03 00 PM Alternatively you can reminders from Add New drop down list in the home page Log a Call BR D Request X Reminder E Task CH Event nes 4 Canned Response D Solution LA Contract fj Account a Contact ZOHO Corporation 37 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 2 Click Add New link from My Reminder pop up The Reminders page opens as shown Reminder Attend the demo on softcel Date 2009 09 10 Time 03 00 PM Remind me ihr wei before Add Cancel 3 Specify the summary in the provided text field Say you want a reminder to attend a demo on Softcel 4 Select the Date and Time for the reminder The date field is set to today s date and the time is set by default as 11 00 AM Change the date and time settings To change the date select the calender icon iand choose the date of your choice From the time drop down box choose the time at which the task is scheduled 5 Select the reminder duration say before 1 hr or 2 hr from the Remind me before combo box By default the message would be Never 6 Click Add The new reminder is added along with the list of already existing reminders in the ascending order based on date and time Viewing all Reminders You can view all the open and completed reminders along with the reminder details such as Reminder Date and Module The Link is spe
20. 4 Specify the complete solution in the Contents text field This field is also mandatory ZOHO Corporation 133 10 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide If the solution requires any additional files to support the article then you can attach the same by clicking Attach File s link The list of available topics and sub topics is listed under Topics drop down You can group this solution to a topic by selecting the Topic from the drop down This field is mandatory You can specify keywords which will help in improving the search capability by provide accurate search result While entering multiple keywords separate them with comma Select Publish this solution in Self Service Portal also check box to make this solution available in the customer portal Click Add If you do not wish to add the solution then click Cancel If you permission to approve the solution while creating the Add and Approve button appears Click this button to add and approve the solution ZOHO Corporation 134 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solution Details Page The View Solution Details page organizes the details of the solution in a logical manner From this page you can perform operations on a solution such as edit delete and approve reject solutions To view the details of a solution 1 Click on the Solution tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 Click th
21. Click on the Reports tab in the header pane to open the All Reports page Click New Query Report button The Query Editor opens Click Create button Click New Query Report option This opens the Query Editor page Specify the title of the report in the Report Title field This field is mandatory Specify the query to be executed in the Query field his field is also mandatory The Logs displays all error messages on providing any wrong query ool Click Run Report to run query report Tips 1 Date Formulae DATE FORMAT FROM_UNIXTIME COLUMN_NAME 1000 d m Y k Wi Column Alias Minutes Formulae ROUND COLUMN_NAME 1000 60 60 Minutes Hours Formulae ROUND COLUMN_NAME 1000 3600 Hours Compare Date COLUMN_NAME gt UNIX_TIMESTAMP DATE 2006 07 24 00 00 00 1000 Convert Memory in GB MEMORY_COLUMN 1024 1024 1024 Default Value For Null Data COALESCE COLUMN_NAME Unassigned 7 Group by Query statement will be ends with order by lt column_index gt ZOHO Corporation 344 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Schedule Reports You can schedule to run the selected reports daily weekly or monthly using this option On scheduling the report the selected report gets generated automatically on the specified date and time and the generated report is sent to the respective person through e mail Thus by scheduling the reports you get the data in regul
22. ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 2 Click Split as New Request link The request is split as a new request with consecutive request id 1 Due by time is not mentioned for the split request 2 Notes tasks conversation thread will not be available in the split request Delete a Conversation You can delete a specific conversation from the contact To delete a conversation 1 Click Expand An radio button beside the contact conversation thread 4 2 Click Delete button A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The conversation is removed from the conversation thread You also have an option to View the Child Request History by clicking on the View History link ZOHO Corporation 96 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Start Stop Request Timer If a support rep is unable to close a request due to lack of necessary information and resources or if the support rep is unable to identify the problem then the support rep can move the request to On Hold Status On moving a request to On Hold status the timer for the request is put to a halt So if the due by time is specified for a request the time interval for which the request is put On Hold is added to the due by time of the request on starting the request timer This avoids unnecessary SLA violation which reflects the efficiency of the support team Note 1 You can add Status which reflects the req
23. Removing Login Permissions You can also choose to remove his her login permissions 1 In the Edit Support Rep form under Login Details block click the Yes link beside Remove Login field A confirmation window appears 2 Click Ok to proceed with the operation If you do not wish to remove the login permission click Cancel 3 Click Save Delete Support Reps 1 Click the Delete icon beside the support rep s name to delete from the List View A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click OK to proceed with the delete operation Note The Delete icon will not be available beside the name of the support rep who has EN currently logged in to the application To delete that support rep you need to log out and log in as a different support rep and then delete the details Also the administrator details can be deleted only by another support rep with administrative privileges ZOHO Corporation 281 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Manager The account manager keeps a track of the customer account and keeps them up to date The account managers are support reps who are in close association with the customers The account manager have permissions to view all the request raised by the contacts in the account thereby coordinating with the support rep to solve the issues immediately 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on the Ac
24. Request Account Info Time Entry Resolution If you have a Zoho Account then you can avail the remote assistance feature and access your customers machine from your desk Refer Remote Assistance The block contains tabs to view Request details Account Information View and Add Resolution View and Add Time Entry and History to keep a track on all the actions performed on a request If tasks are added to the request then a Task tab appears beside Time Entry tab ZOHO Corporation 90 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Request Details The request tab displays the Subject and Description of the request The Conversation button appears if there are any conversation threads to the request Clicking on Conversation button scrolls down to view the conversation threads You have an option to view all conversations or only the conversation shown to contacts To know more refer Conversation In addition the request details block also displays request properties like Status Group Category Sub Category Item Support Rep Priority Mode Level Created Date Due Date Product Created By and additional fields if available You can edit the request properties using Edit button or the Inline edit option to edit a specific request property Say you want to change the support rep from J ake Thomas to Jennifer Doe then click on the name of the support rep and select the name from the drop down l
25. Sample form for the operation getContact is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getContact gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Contact ID of the contact to view read gt lt input type hidden name account value Account Name of the contact gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt Say the email ID specified is jake acme com and the Account name is Acme The Contact details of Jake from the account Acme is listed To conduct a search for a specific contact or to list the contacts according the alphabet specify the starting alphabetic of the contact ZOHO Corporation 330 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide View Read Product This operation displays the Product associated to the specified account along with the product details URL Format The URL format for the Account operation View Read Product for an account For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getProduct For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getProduct Parameters The parameter to be passed via HTTP method is given below Parameter Value Description account string Account name to view the products Output Response Format The output respons
26. SupportCenter Home Requests Solutions Manage Business Units General Helpdesk Settings 2 e Mail Configuration Time Entry Type Account Settings A Product Type Contract Settings Ex Suppor Services Roles User Survey Settings 3 Survey Settings User and Related Settings General v Contracts Acc Business Unit Settings L Helpdesk Customizer Ed TimeEntry Additional Fields Z Product Additional Fields Support Plans i Contact Additional Fields B Define Survey Contacts Global Settings R Request Template SE Product EA r Service Level Agreements Support Rep Additional Fields Survey Preview Admin Reports Support z Scheduled Requests Account Additional Fields ad Operational hours Support Reps Survey Results ZOHO Corporation Add New D 43 Notification Rules Sales Additional Fields Holidays EI Account Managers List View A Business Rules ay e Schedule CSV import 19 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Global Settings A few admin settings are applicable to all the Business Units configured in the application like the Mail Server Settings Customer Portal scheduling a backup and so on These admin settings are grouped as Global Settings In addition to the above list Global Additional Fields can be configured for s
27. status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml addAccount status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below ZOHO Corporation 323 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml addAccount status Failure statuscode 4003 statusmessage Permission Denied the API application is not provided with View Read permission Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation addAccount is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addAccount gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name name value Name of the account gt lt input type hidden name description value Brief Description about the account gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt View Read Account This operation displays the Account details by specifying either the Account name Account ID or the starting alphabet of the account URL Format The URL format for the Account operation View Read For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getAccount For json output
28. Before V After If resolution time is elapsed then escalate Note C Enable Level 1 Escalation 13 Save the details By default the SLAs escalations are enabled You can disable the SLA escalations by selecting Disable Escalation button from the SLA list view page Edit Service Level Agreement 1 From the SLA list view page click the Edit icon beside the SLA Name to be edited The Edit SLa form opens with the values populated while adding the SLA Modify the details and Save the changes Delete Service Level Agreement 1 In the SLA list view page click the Delete icon beside the SLA Name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion The SLA is deleted from the SLA list Organize Service Level Agreements You can decide the order in which the SLA should be applied on the incoming request by Organizing Service Level Agreement With this option you can also organize the SLA to appear in the list view by following the steps below 1 Inthe SLA list view page click Organize SLA link A pop up window is opened with the list of available SLAs in the order that is appearing the list view Select an SLA and click Move up or Move Down button beside the list Click Save ZOHO Corporation 270 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Operational Hours You can set the operational hours of your organization which calculates the du
29. Contacts You can search for existing contacts associate bulk contacts or add a new contact for an account ZOHO Corporation 182 Associating existing contacts 1 Specify the contact name in Select a Contact field If the contact name is available in the list the name with the email id is listed Select the contact from this list amp sharon Add to List Sharon Harper Name Mark Adams Acme Corporation Dacme com r acme com np acme com sharonp acme com N i Acm e Corporations 2 Click Add to list button The specified contact is added to the contact list as shown You can also add a new contact and enter the contact details subsequently 1 Specify the contact name in Select a Contact field 2 Click Add to List button 3 A dialog box appears confirming to add the new contact and associate to the account 4 Click Ok to proceed The contact gets added to the list Associating Bulk Contacts 1 Click Associate Contact button to open all the Recently Added Contacts list view page 2 Enable the check box beside the contact names you wish to associate with the account 3 Click Associate button You need not select the account from the drop down as the account name is already displayed 4 The selected contacts are associated to the account and can be viewed in the account details page Contacts gt Recently Added Contacts Recently Added Contacts All A B C D E F G H J K L M N o P Q R
30. From the Add Edit participants pop up select the users i e Support Reps Contacts and Account Managers from the drop down The respective users configured in the application are listed You can conduct a search for the participants by entering the search keyword text in the search field Add Edit participants Select users Support Reps i ES mike G Jeniffer Doe lt jeniffer acme com gt Howard Stern lt howard acme cam gt Tom Wiliams lt tom acme com gt John Roberts lt john acme com gt Jake Thomas lt jake acme com gt Heather Graham lt heather acme com gt Shawn Adams lt shawn acme com gt Bob Adams lt bob acme com gt administrator lt admin acme com gt Mike Thomas lt mike lexcorp com gt To move the participants to the Selected List block select the user and click gt gt Assign button ZOHO Corporation 55 Select users Support Reps v p Selected List Jeniffer Doe lt jeniffer acme com gt Tom Williams lt tom acme com gt Howard Stern lt howard acme com gt John Roberts lt john acme com gt Tom Williams lt tom acme com gt Heather Graham lt heather acme com gt John Roberts lt john acme com gt 44 Jeniffer Doe lt jeniffer acme com gt Jake Thomas lt jake acme com gt Heather Graham lt heather acme com gt Shawn Adams lt shawn acme com gt Bob Adams lt bob acme com gt administrator lt admin acme com gt Mi
31. Get gt lt form gt ZOHO Corporation 321 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Contact Related Operations While invoking the account contact related operations through API the operation defined are based on the parameter value and the developer needs to submit a request to the url via HTTP POST or GET method NOTE Before proceeding with the account contact related operations and its corresponding parameters please note that the parameters are case sensitive and should be used as defined The following operations can be performed on account contact through API e Adding Account e View Read Account e Adding Contact e View Read Contact e View Read Product Adding Account URL Format The URL format for the Account operation Add For xmi output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addAccount For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json addAccount Parameters The parameters that needs to be passed via HTTP method for adding a new account are as follows Parameter Value Description name string Name of the account annualRevenue string Annual Revenue of the account email string Email Address of the account website string Website of the account phone string Contact Information of the account fax string Contact Information of the account industry string The type of Industry to which t
32. ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Topics Template Using Topics Template you can group specific topics under a template and assign this template to an account The contacts associated to the account can view solutions pertaining to the topics grouped under this template For instance you have grouped the topics warranty queries and replacement queries under the template Warranty and assigned this topics template to an account say Acme The contacts associated to Acme can view the solutions based on the topics warranty and replacement queries alone Thus restricting the contact to view all the solutions in the application On adding a topics template the template can be shared by other accounts in the application but a single account cannot have multiple templates To assign topics template to an account refer Assign Templates under Accounts module 1 Topics Template can be shared by other accounts 2 A single account can be assigned to one topics template 3 For users without accounts configure the options in Settings gt Solution View under Admin module To view the list of available topics templates 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page 2 Click on Topics Template option The list of available topics template is displayed From this page you can add edit and delete a topics template Adding Topics Template 1 Click Add New Template button T
33. New Account Delete Topics Template 7 Set the number of accounts per page and navigation buttons View the entire list of accounts configured in SupportCenter Plus application by settings the number of accounts to be viewed per page Navigate through the pages using the next and previous navigation buttons 1 40f4 Account Manager Account Alan Smith Acme Corp Andrea Whitman Acme Inc ZOHO Corporation 168 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 8 Recent Items All the recent items viewed by you is displayed under the Recent Items block You can also navigate back to the pages on clicking on the item link wv Recent Items S Sharon Harper aij Acme Corporations Resolution for iphon D Maintenan Restart online demo ZOHO Corporation 169 Accounts based on Filters You can view accounts based on filters from the accounts list view page In addition you can also create new filters using the Custom View option to place accounts in specific groups There are some pre defined filters in SupportCenter Plus as shown Accounts gt All Accounts All Accounts v Views Account Views gt All Accounts A B E Recently Added Account New mes Delete Topics Accounts Having Contra Accounts With SubAccou Account Name amp ES Acme Corporations es All Accounts Lists all the accounts available in SupportCenter Plus e Recently Added Accounts Lists
34. Searching EE 175 Adding a New ACCOUNT ssssssssssssrrunrtrrrrnn nr rn nnna nannu narr EEEE EEEE EEEE 177 Account Details PAGE srcani na eene 179 Editing and Deleting ee e TEE 186 Assign Unassign Topic Template sssssssssrrssrrerrreenrrrrernnrrn nane 187 Importing Sales details from CSV File 189 Importing Accounts Contacts from CSV Pie 190 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Contacts List VIEW 2 ehre ege EEGEN 192 Contacts based on Filters ciscccscehsedeaseaiciustencernctesaasateckdeconssassegusaieees 194 OUST Mi RE 195 Customizing Contact List TER 198 Search ENEE ge aa ee 200 Adding New Contact EE 202 Contact Details EE 204 Editing and Deleting COMEBCE EE 207 Reconcile Contacts geseet Age EES EES EARE 208 Associate Accounts with Contacts sscsecceecersavarsnuceyevsaneareuunvssmurcnctanedceds 209 Unapproved COMEACIS EE 210 Registered e EE 211 CONFI GURATI ONS ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna QLD leegen gege dee 213 Mail Server SettiNgS du irern e r ERR NEEN EN EEE EEN EEN 214 Mall Configuratio Meem na enina n aa a A E a EN dates aaa ee aaa 217 Twitter Setting 218 Computer Telephony Integration CTIE 220 Telephony Server Setting 220 CCK tO A IEN 221 Screen PO Deg Herceptin aw adored dee EE 222 Helpdesk Customizer ccc eee eee nee ee nena eae eee 224 Configuring Category Sub Categorv ltems cc cceee cere e cece eee eee ee
35. You can also approve reject bulk solutions from the list view page To approve reject bulk solutions 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page 2 Select Approval Pending Solutions from the filters All the solutions with the status as approval pending is listed 3 Enable the check box beside the solutions which you want to approve reject 4 Select Approve Actions drop down gt Approve Solutions i The Approve Comments pops up ii Specify any related Comments in the field provided iii Click Approve 5 If you wish to reject the solution select Reject Solutions under Approve Actions i The Reject Comments pops up ii Specify comments such as reason to reject the solution in the Comments field iii Click Reject The approved solutions can be viewed by the users in the customer portal The rejected solutions can be edited and sent for approval to the concerned support rep Thus the solution is not completely deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 142 Managing Topics You can view all your customized topics under Manage Topics From this page you can add new topics rename an existing topic and move topics and sub topics to a different parent topic This provides you the ability to organize your solutions in a logical manner that would meet your organization s needs To manage topics 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page
36. You can also send notification to the support reps on receiving a new request and if a request is left unpicked The groups configured is listed in the drop down menu in the New Request form To open the group configuration page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page d 2 Click the Groups icon under Users and Related Settings block The Group List page is displayed from where you can add edit or delete groups Add Group 1 Click the Add New Group link 2 Specify a unique name to identify the group in Group Name field 3 Select the support reps under this group from the Available Support Reps list box Click gt gt button to move them to Support Reps interested in this group 4 You can send notification to the support reps in the group when a new request is added to the group Enable Send notification to group support rep s when a new request is added to this group check box Click Choose button to open the List of Group Support Rep pop up window Select the support reps to notify and click OK You can send notification to support reps when a request from the group is left unpicked Enable Send notification to support rep s when a request in this group is left unpicked check box This drops down the support rep selection field and time period configuration after which the notification will be sent Soy Warning Enabling the check boxes while adding group does not ensur
37. ZOHO Corporation 334 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Reports Reports play a vital role as its essential in every organization You can view reports based on the time spent by a support rep on an account product or reports on all the over due requests You can even schedule reports Share reports to accounts and manage reports in the Reports tab intracts Accounts Contacts Admin Reports Support Add New D Go All Reports Showing All Reports v New Custom Report New Query Report New Scheduled Report Manage Folders Report Settings i Survey Reports Fi Survey Overview Report Edit E Survey Results by Category Edit F Survey Results by Department Edit BE Survey Results by Level Edit EG Survey Results by Mode Edit Ers Survey Results by Priority Edit Era Survey Results by Contact Edit Si Edit Survey Results by Support Rep Account Reports i Timespent Reports i Reports by overdue requests Reports by completed requests Reports by pending requests Reports by all requests i Summary Reports The reports tab consists of the following e Custom Reports Customize your own reports that suits your organizations needs e Query Report Create Custom Reports by defining a Query e Schedule Report Generate reports automatically on daily weekly or monthly basis e Manage
38. ZOHO Corporation ionty ANTE Due Date Jun 29 2009 01 39 PM 925 852 2564 RB 1234567890 63 Send Inv 925 852 2564 1234567890 i fr a z end an Invitation to contact to offer Remote Assistance Request Account Info Resolution Time y OTY This link is available only if the contact email Id is specified either while adding a new contact or while creating a new request Click Send Invite link A dialog box appears confirming the operation Click Ok to proceed Inviting Contacts from Contact Details page You can also invite the contact from the Contact Details page upon entering the email Id Click Send Invite link A dialog box appears confirming the operation Click Ok to proceed Contacts gt View Contact Shawn Paul Can view own requests only Contact Details Contact s Request Edit Contact Delete Contact Contact Name Shawn Paul Account Name ZOHO Corporation Phone 925 852 2564 L Call Mobile 1234567890 EB call Email shawnpaul zohocorp com Alternate Email shawnp zohocorp com Remote Assistance 3 Send Invit Job Title h Engineer Description No Description Send an Invitation to contact to offer Remote Assistance ZOHO Corporation 251 Account Settings Accounts provide valuable customer information such as the contacts associated to the account and the products purchased by the account In addition it also provides the kind of support service offered to the account which helps in prioritizing t
39. drag the field and place it over an empty cell as shown in the image The field can be placed only in the highlighted grey area The request details owner details contact details and category details can be moved as a whole block Canvas Request Details Level NONE Owner Details Group No Just select Support Rep Setting Field Properties You can set the field properties that is mark the field as mandatory or remove the field from the canvas Thus you can customize the entire form by retaining only the relevant fields in the canvas for a template To customize the form 1 Hover over the field an Edit Field icon and Remove Field icon appears 2 To mark a field as mandatory click the Edit Field Properties icon Enable Set as Mandatory check box The field is symbolized as mandatory 3 Click Remove Field icon to remove the field from the canvas The detached fields are added under the Field List NOTE The fields such as request details subject and description do not have field EN properties and hence can be only re arranged in the canvas ZOHO Corporation 237 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Drag and Drop Fields from Field List The fields removed from the canvas are listed in the Field List To add these fields in the canvas drag the field from the Field List and drop it onto the canvas The drop areas is highlighted The dragged field ca
40. if the contact is a first time caller then you can enter the contact and request details using log a call for the new user Click Log a Call button to access this option e Search existing customers and log a call e Log a call for new users Search existing customers and log a call When a call is from a known customer whose details are entered in the application then you can conduct a quick search using the parameters like contact name account name phone and mobile number job title and contract name Log a Call Search existing customers and log a call Acme Search Find by Contact Name Account name Contract Name Phone Mobile Email Job Title Search results for acme Contacts 8 ID 301 Sharon Harper Engineer amp 4cme Phone 984 763 7432 Email sharon acme com Add Request View Requests Accounts dh ID 301 Acme Manufacturing 41 Phone 983642742 Email info acme com Add Request View Requests The result displays the contacts and accounts Here in the image Acme is the account and Sharon Harper is the contact associated to the account So on conducting a search with the account name the account and the contacts associated to the account appears You can add new requests by clicking Add Request link A new request form pops up in which the contact name contact details and account information are pre filled with the corresponding values All you need to do is enter the Request Titl
41. particular groups or setting the priority of the request Business Rules enables you to organize all your incoming requests Further you can also enable Notification to your support reps either through mail or SMS when a new request is created or assigned ZOHO Corporation 62 Setting the due by time The services offered is based on the Contracts and Support Plan associated to the customer s account through which the Service Level Agreement is determined and the due by time for the request is applied The work flow explains the application of due by time based on contracts Identify Customer y Is the customer and his company available in the Identify active Contract Support Plan Contact database S Yes p Finds the Support ae t 1 Pian from the u 3 R SE Finding the Account product contract Contract gt SLA sen Step 2 Does the Support Customer sends identity Product Finding the Account based contract Plan have associated Request Does the Customer Request p SLAs pertain to any product No p Uses the Default Support Plan Support Reps can pick requests that are left unassigned or can assign the requests to other support reps and groups You can enter resolution or search for solutions from the Knowledge base module Closing Requests Once the customer has acknowledged the resolution he undergoes the billing process Support Reps can then change the status of the request to closed You can
42. 1 1 Collapse Sent To shawn acme com Status Pending Approval 1 Pending Approval on 29 Sep 2009 12 27 14 Sent On 29 Sep 2009 12 26 05 Status es Denied 1 1 Expand Sent On 29 Sep 2009 10 56 56 Status Approved 1 1 Expand Viewing History Every action performed on a request from the time of its creation can be viewed in the History tab The details displayed in the history tab are in the ascending order with the earliest performed action shown at the top of the page and the latest action at the bottom of the page ZOHO Corporation 93 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Conversations All the mail transactions between the support rep handling the request and the contact can be viewed as Conversations in the request details page The conversation are thread in ascending order of time as and when a reply is received for the request You have an option to either View all the Conversations both private and public conversations or only View Contact Conversation public conversation The conversation thread between the support rep and contact are public conversations whereas the conversation thread between two support reps fall under private conversation View All Conversations View Contact Conversations gt E gt From Jake Thomas On Sep 30 2009 10 11AM gt Ee From Jake Thomas On Sep 30 200910 12AM gt Ch From Jake Thomas On Sep 30 2009 10 13 AM gt
43. 2 Click Customer Portal Settings icon D Ze under Accounts Settings block The Customer Portal Settings page opens to view the following blocks e Option to enable disable the customer portal Portal Name Portal Content Portal Options Portal Color Customization Enable disable the customer portal You have an option to enable or disable the customer portal To make the customer portal available to the users select Enable radio button Portal Name If required you can specify a Name to appear in the customer portal Say SCP Customer Service Portal or Acme Customer Portal Portal Content The Portal Content block consists of the Header Content Area and Sidebar Subheader Content Area Sidebar s Header On the header you can display your company logo and specific URLs to the product or website Enable the check box beside Logo to display the company logo in the customer portal To add direct links from the customer portal Enable the check box beside Links Select Add Links From the Add Links pop up enter a Name to be displayed in the portal Specify the Target URL in the field provided Save the details Enable the check box beside the newly new link to make it available in the customer portal You can also edit and delete the links ai ae el a ZOHO Corporation 261 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Portal Content Header Content Area Sidebar w Logo V Links dr Add Link Li
44. 2009 05 49 PM If you wish to add more details to the request like setting the priority and assigning to support rep select Add more Details link which opens the new request form ZOHO Corporation 205 Tasks and Events The tasks and events associated to the contact are listed in the Tasks and Events block respectively You can also add a new task and event from this page Clicking on the Title of the task or event redirects you to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations To know more on adding new task and event refer Add New Tasks and Add New Events ZOHO Corporation 206 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing and Deleting Contact ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus provides you with the option to modify and delete the existing contacts provided you have the corresponding access permission Edit Contact 1 Click the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contacts list view page 2 Click the Edit icon beside the name of the contact you wish to edit The Edit Contact page opens with the values populated while adding the contact 3 Modify the details and Update the changes Alternatively you can also edit the contacts from the contact details page To know more refer Edit Contact To reset the password of the contact 1 From the Edit Contact form click Reset Password link beside the Password field The Reset Password dialog pops up
45. 3 CT al in SSS RR Solutions Contracts Isks available Column wise Search You can also perform column wise search of contacts if you know any of the contact detail such as contact name email ID login name and so on To perform a column wise search 1 From the contacts list view page click on Search icon 4 The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 2 Enter the search string in the column of your choice You can enter keywords in more than one column to perform a combined column search 3 Click Go The search results matching the search string s are displayed ZOHO Corporation 201 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Adding New Contact You can add contacts manually in SupportCenter Plus associate them to accounts and provide login access permission In addition you can also configure the permission to view requests for the contact while accessing the Customer Portal The new contact form can be accessed in two ways in the SupportCenter Plus application a Add New drop down b Contacts tab Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Contacts form the home page Add New Ko Wa Call SCH p Request Reminder Task Event D LA Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact d A E t O e To configure the New Co
46. API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Request ID of the request to view read note gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt View Read Time Entry for a request This operation displays the Time Entry added to a request by specifying the Request ID URL Format The URL format for the Request operation View Read Time Entry for a request For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getTimeEntryDetails For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getTimeEntryDetails ZOHO Corporation 318 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Parameters The parameter to be passed via HTTP method is id string Request ID of the request to view the Time Entry Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml ge
47. Assistance Certain scenarios may require the support rep to access machines in remote locations say a customer from New York requires immediate assistance and the Support Team is located in San Francisco Similarly when a request is raised via phone call it would be great if the support rep could send an invite for remote assistance and access the customers machine from his desk thus increasing productively and saving time to resolve the issue That is where SupportCenter Plus Remote Assistance comes into play Instead of launching a whole bunch of softwares to access remote machines SupportCenter Plus helps your Support Team to remotely view diagnose and resolve issues of your contacts from anywhere in the world With Business Units Computer Telephony Integration and Remote Assistance SupportCenter Plus is emerging as a globally supported customer support and hepdesk software Supports Reps no longer need to handle endless threads and reply to mails With CTI and Remote Assistance support reps can resolve requests instantly and with ease Note e Please note that a separate license needs to be purchased for CTI and Remote Assistance e A Zoho Account is required to avail Remote Assistance feature special Administradon Console Helper Local Syster Doster Event Not ication o be Local Systere Local Syster Local Serie MELPDESK Local Service Gy Tomina Services Cane usar t d Local Systere Wa Termina Servicers Session Onect
48. Click on Manage Topics link The manage topics page opens with the available topics and their subtopics listed in the hierarchy Solutions gt Golf related Queries Manage Topics lt lt Back Manage Topics Available Topics Add New Topic Topic name Solutions Actions e Basketball related Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e General 2 Rename Change Parent Delete CH Rename Change Parent Delete e Replacement Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Support Queries 2 Rename Change Parent Delete Transportation Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Warranty Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Water sport related Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete Add a New Topic Rename a Topic Change Parent for a topic e Delete Topic Add a New Topic 1 From the Manage Topics page select Add New Topic button 2 You have two columns such as Topic Name field and Parent Topic list 3 You can either Add New Topic or Create a sub topic for a parent topic Topic Name Specify either a parent topic or a sub topic Parent Topics This is the main or root topics under which you can have n number of subtopics and its related contents The newly added parent topic or sub topic is added to this list ZOHO Corporation 143 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 4 If you are creating a New Topic specify the Topic Name and select Topics Root under parent topic 5 I
49. Delete 2 Topics Template Create topic template by grouping specific topics and assigning it to an account The account can view solutions pertaining to the topics under the assigned topic template Refer Topics Template 3 Search Solutions Search for requests instantly on entering the solution ID and search keywords Refer Search Solutions Q admin password Search New Solution Delete Approve Actions Y 4 Browse by Topics Browse for solution under each topic specified under Manage Topics Refer Browsing Solutions by Topics 5 Set the number of solutions per page and navigation button You can set the number of solutions to be displayed in the solution list view Browse by Topics v 1 4of4 25 per page v 10 per page Created On Pu a 50 per page Sep 28 2009 05 32 PM Yes 100 per page Queries Oct5 2009 04 35PM Yes administrator 6 Custom and Manage Views Customize the page to display solutions using Custom View option You can create criteria to filter solutions accumulated in the solution list view page Thus sorting and viewing solutions based on your requirements Refer Custom Views ZOHO Corporation 124 e P create filters to customize and organize your solution list view The filters created can be made public or private e FL View edit and delete customized views 7 Solution based on filters View specific group of solution through pre defined filters Refer Solutions Based on Fi
50. Description fields are pre populated with the specified data Warning d While editing the subject of the email ensure that the request ID value remains intact with the symbols beside it omelets i 9 You can customize the message and content using Canned Response Select the Canned Response from the available list A message alert stating that the Subject and Description fields will be overwritten appears Click Ok to proceed To know more refer Canned Response ZOHO Corporation 116 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide s Save Save and Send for review Cancel Jake Thomas lt jeke acme com gt adam acme com Add Bcc Fwd 11 replace the battery of Iphone Canned Responses Insert Solution FiO B zju RW z 1 BY op a JAF Contact Sharon Harper Due by time 22 Feb 2010 17 49 Category General Description Hello I would like to replace the battery of my Iphone as it does not seem to work properly I m still under the warranty period and would like to get it exchanged Regards Sharon Harper Click for details h attach File s Attached files 10 You can insert solutions directly into the application using Insert Solution link Select a Topic The corresponding solutions title under the topic is displayed Click Insert Solution link beside the specific topic The solution is added automatically as the message content Sub
51. Folder Keeps a track on the number of reports under each folder and option to add a new folder e Report Settings Customize your report column size the data and time format to be displayed in reports and options to Disable links grouping per page and specify default values for empty fields ZOHO Corporation 335 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Pre defined Reports SupportCenter Plus provides you with pre defined reports that can be classified as Survey Reports Account Reports Timespent Reports Reports by Overdue requests Reports by Completed requests Reports by Pending requests Reports by all requests and Summary Reports Support Reps with administrator privilege and Full access permission over Reports module can edit these pre defined reports to suit their needs Survey Reports These reports provide you with the summary details on the survey results based on various parameters All these reports help in measuring the efficiency and effectiveness of your support team and take respective corrective actions Under Survey reports you have e Survey Overview Report which gives you the overall ratings of each of the questions in the survey based on the feedback of the users who took the survey The ratings give you an idea about the value that is associated with the corresponding question This report provides both tabular and a graphic representation of the results e Survey Results by Catego
52. Guide Viewing Survey Results Once the contact completes the survey the support rep can view the survey results To view the survey results 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page SE 2 Click on Survey Results icon JM under User Survey Settings block The Survey Results list view page opens 3 Click on the Subject of the survey result The User Satisfaction Survey page pops up Metem iotol My Org Inc User Satisfaction Survey SupportCenter Survey Details d SE y Ip splay evel Survey sent to Sharon Harper Survey sent for M Iphone dis la lev f is not working Survey sent on 18 Nov 2009 15 40 R t ID 3 Survey answered on 18 Nov 2009 15 40 EH Created on 29 Oct 2009 10 45 Closed on 18 Nov 2009 15 40 Sharon Harper s comments and suggestion Sharon Harper s Answers 4 Your opinion on our service Good Excellent 2 Your opinion on the turn around time of the support rep Good Excellent 3 Your opinion on the product Good Excellent ZOHO Corporation 294 Organization Settings Organization settings includes configuring general settings such as the language in which the application should be displayed Active Directory Settings enable Business Units options and so on In addition organization settings also includes configuring organizational details scheduling backup process at regular intervals and notifying support
53. In inquire Preferences You can change the language displayed in the application customize your signature change your password and lots more from the Preference link Help Preferences v administrator Log out Dashboards COO lt ZOHO Corporation 24 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Feedback Send a feedback immediately to our support rep from the application Click here to know how to go about sending it Online Help Online Status You can select your online status to be shown to other technicians By default the status is Online You can change the online status either from the Home page or from Settings in the Admin module we administrator Lc Online Offline dei E OO ja COME LO Add new Loga Call a 25 Sep 2010 05 28 ZOHO Corporation 25 License Expiry Alert The license expiry alert is displayed just below the header tabs with details such as the number of days the license is valid the date by which the license has to be renewed sales contact email id link to apply license and a drop down box to select the number of days after which the reminder is to be displayed Home Requests Solutions Contracts Accounts Contacts Admin Reports Support Add New Attention PXT Hida Your AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus License is about to expire in 24 days Renew your License before Fri 09 Oct 2009 Te purchase a new license or to e
54. Industry form edit the fields you want to change 3 Click Save to save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete I ndustry To delete Industry 1 Click the delete icon beside the industry name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion The Industry is deleted from the list If you do not want to delete the industry then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 253 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Product Types Products purchased by the account can be categorized into specific product types Product Type is a parent category under which you can group the purchased products Say Adobe Photoshop and Macromedia Flash can be categorized under the product type as Software while HP Inkjet Printer can be categorized under the product type Printer To open the product type configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click Product Type icon E under the Account Settings block The list of available product types are displayed From this page you can add edit and delete product types Add Product Types 1 Click Add New Product Type link In the Add Product Type form enter the Product Type Name The name should be unique and is a mandatory field 3 If required enter relevant Description for the product type Click Save Edit Product Type Click t
55. Requests to Support Rene 116 E mail the Support RED ed ege ER ege EE GE 119 SMS the Support ROG E 121 SOLUTIONS Aessen geeNSeESSENERRSKNN REES NOR ERAN EERENR H N ERR EE NK EEN eEER 122 S l tion LIS TE 123 Solutions based on filters oi lccindcccsnessccnsdndorateasceesooendenaessbassedeeYosas heeded 126 Custom Ee Ee Ee EE Eege 127 Customizing Solution List VIEW ssccccneseunctavdessvessatadeeacntetiawscnsepeteadeseenns 130 le E el EG 131 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Adding New SOMO DEE 133 Solution Details Page EE 135 Editing SOlUtIONS E 137 Deleting Solutions ere en EEN EE dE SE ege 138 Forward SONIIOM EE 139 SUDMIE for Approval ee Eege A 140 Approve Reje ct SGIUUGN EE 142 lte Uiie RK e EE 143 Browsing Solutions Dy Topic TEE 146 Be e Ree EE 147 CONTRACTS ssisrsisivannnnnsuannasnnannnannanannananananaanansnuanansvoinananoadananoi 149 Contracts E 151 Contracts based Be ehr EE 153 len EE 154 Customizing Contract List VICW scsncdssctess EES E NEEN Ehre ga 157 Search ege EE 158 Creating New Contract eege ax dauesnextedinds 159 Contract Details Pag E 161 Editing and Deleting ele EC 162 Renew EE 163 Printing Contracts gedet 165 ACCOUNTS a neeaEaRRESRARaRRRSEEESNRAEE ERAN EREENEEEREANEEEEEEAERE ERT ERR EELER ERER 166 Accounts HISE Eeer EE 167 ACCOUNTS based on FIGS tee cencasrespanuemeteencbenauntceneducqinadsceeneueeess 170 CUStOM EE 171 Customizing Accounts List View 174
56. St Mail Server Mail Configuration Tweeter Settings Telephony Server Helpdesk Request Settings Settings Custormaer Template rz ta p 4 Scheduled Nobficetion Rules Susiness Rules Tene Entry Type Tirmetrtry Requests Addibonal Fields Account Settings e gt EI E a A E Industry Product Type Product Additonal Product Account Sales Addmona Fields Additional Freids Fields Custo Contract Settings f gt pe LG Le E a wi Support Serves Support Plans Service Level Operstons hours Hobdeys User and Related Settings P e Ka 2 SS SI Ze Roles Contact Additiona Support Rep Kaes anapun Group fields D Windows Domans User Survey Settings e gt ES 7 is zi La Survey Settings Define Survey Survey Preview Survey Results Organization Settings Organization Settings Backup Schedul Details Home Requests Solutions Contrects Accounts Contacts Admin Reports Support ZOHO Corporation 212 Helpdesk Settings If you have logged into the application as the administrator then you need to configure the helpdesk settings before the request module can be opened for real time functioning of fetching the customer support mails and tracking the same The following helpdesk settings need to be configured o e Mail Server settings kS o e Mail Configuration 7 e Twitter Settings e Telephony Server Settings M SAN e Helpdesk Customizer e Request Template R
57. Thus maintaining information of the branches of an account too Contacts Module The contact information tracking enables you to have a tab on what is the latest progress on the status of the customer the type of customer and other such related information To view the various contacts and their details click the Contacts tab in the header pane Reports Module Using reports module you can evaluate and analyze the efficiency and productivity of your support team and the load of requests handled by them A set of predefined reports are generated from the data available in the application Apart from the preset reports you can also customize your reports using Custom Reports option ZOHO Corporation 8 Getting Started Installed the product and cannot figure out from where to start your configurations Getting Started Guide tells you how to go about working on the product after Installation The initial features to be configured in SupportCenter Plus application are e SupportCenter Plus Users e Importing Support Reps e Importing Accounts amp Contacts e Email and Mail Server Configurations e Configuring Business Units e Customer Portal Settings ZOHO Corporation 9 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus SupportCenter Plus Users In SupportCenter Plus there are three kinds of users e Administrator support reps privileged to configure and manage all the settings in the application e S
58. To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Click Save Only the selected columns are added in the accounts list view Any Additional fields added for the account will also be displayed in the column list view You can also sort the list view in ascending or descending order Click Account Manager column header once to sort it in ascending order Clicking twice will sort the column in descending order New Account Delete Topics Template Select a Account Name Account Manager E O E Acme Matt Brady O amp Tricell Inc Mark Richard O ES ARCAM Corporation Mark Richard ZOHO Corporation 174 Searching Accounts You can search for accounts based on the keywords and column wise search based on account parameters such as account name account manager topics template and so on from the accounts list view Search Accounts based on e Keywords amp Alphabets e Column wise Search Search Accounts based on Keywords and Alphabets Accounts tab 1 Click Accounts tab in the header pane to open the account list view page 2 Enter the keyword in the search field provided 3 Click Search All solutions that match the keyword provided by you in the search field is displayed Accounts gt All Accounts All Accounts d Search New Account Delet
59. To field 6 You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the mail address in CC field 7 If you do not wish to disclose the recipient then specify the mail address in the BCC field 8 By default the Subject and Description fields are pre populated with the specified data Warning A While editing the subject of the email ensure that the request ID value remains intact with the symbols beside it unies 9 You can customize the message and content using Canned Response Select the Canned Response from the available list A message alert stating that the Subject and Description fields will be overwritten appears Click Ok to proceed To know more refer Canned Response ZOHO Corporation 113 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide amp Send Save Save and Send for review Cancel From Jake Thomas lt jake acme com gt sharon acme com Add Bcc Re Request ID 11 replace the battery of Iphone Canned Responses 7 lacement of Iphone R I U S KI F ba Iphone Replacement pre p Hor tery On 22 Feb 2010 16 49 Sharon Harper wrote Hello I would like to replace the battery of my Iphone as it does not seem to work property I m still under the warranty period and would like to get it exchanged Regards Sharon Harper attach File s Attached files 10 You can insert solutions directly into the applica
60. You can view the details of the sub account which you have added while creating the sub account under View Sub Account Details page From this page you can view all the sub account s requests edit and delete the sub account In addition you can also associate contacts to a sub account Associating Contacts to Sub Accounts 1 Click on the name of the Sub Account to associate contacts The View Sub Account Details page opens 2 From this page you can either search for contacts associate bulk contacts from the contact list or add a new contact To know more on associating contacts refer Contacts Viewing Sub Account s Requests You can view the recently raised account s requests This helps you to understand the kind of requests received from the sub account A total of five requests can be viewed in the Sub Account Details page To view the remaining requests 1 Click View All Requests link 2 You can also select the type of requests to be viewed from the Filter drop down 3 Close the window Edit Account You can also edit a sub account from the sub account details page 1 Click Edit Sub Account button 2 The Edit Sub Account page opens with the values populated while adding the sub account 3 Modify the details and click Update Delete Sub Account To delete the sub account 1 Click on Delete Sub Account button 2 A confirmation dialog appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The sub account is removed from the list
61. a Support Rep or to a Group and Support Rep 4 Choose the Group of the request from the combo box 5 Select the Support Rep under the selected Group to assign the request 6 Click Assign button ZOHO Corporation 87 Picking up Request You can self pick up all the unassigned requests and assign the requests in your name To pick up requests 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Select the Subject link of the request you wish to pick up 3 From the request details page click on Assign drop down menu gt select Pickup option The request gets assigned to you Bulk Assign Request You can also assign more than one request to the support rep or to yourself To assign requests in bulk 1 From the Requests list view page select the requests to be assigned to a support rep by enabling the check box 2 Click the Assign to drop down menu Close Merge Statu Assign to Support Rep ssigned To George Mallory backup data Open 5 j backup data Open Heather Graham Jake Thomas uest Open Henry William lake Thomas uest Open Howard Stern Jake Thomas uest Open Jake Thomas Jake Thomas lftware Closed backup data Open as re Open roperly Open Open Jeniffer Doe Ruth Hinks John Mathew eorge Mallory John Roberts administrator M Anth NE a alae ai administrator nd critical Open Sep 17 2009 03 05 PM Unassigned 3 Select the name o
62. a new announcement D Announcement made public i e announcements visible to all contacts on log in LH Announcements published only to support reps NE 2 Newly added announcement which is published only to support reps Vi Newly added company wide announcements Add New Announcement To add a new announcement From the announcement block in the home page click on Add New button Specify the Announcement Title This can be a short statement describing the announcement If is a mandatory field 3 Enter the detailed content of the announcement in Announcement Content field Say if there is a webinar conducted for eServer from 4 PM to 6 PM on the 26 09 2009 at Conference Room II then the Announcement title can be Webinar conducted for eServer and the details like the date and venue can be specified as the Announcement Content calender icon You can also select the Time for the selected date from this calender icon By default From contains the date and ZOHO Corporation 34 time when the announcement was created Note To show the announcement forever leave the To field blank 5 To publish this announcement only to the support reps select Show this announcement only to Support reps check box The announcement will not be visible to the contacts 6 You can also send the announcement as email to support reps or contacts on selecting the check box beside Send this announcement as email Enter the To mail a
63. a pop up window Click on Edit button From the edit announcement pop up make the changes and click Save If you do not want to make any changes click Cancel Deleting Announcements To delete a announcement 1 2 3 From the home page click on the Title of the announcement to be deleted The announcement details page pop ups Click on Delete button A confirmation dialog appears Click Ok to proceed with the delete operation The announcement is deleted from the list Alternatively for bulk deletion of announcements 1 2 ER A From the home page click on Show All button in the announcement block The Manage Announcement page opens Select the announcement to be deleted by enabling the check boxes Click Delete button A confirmation dialog box appears Click Ok to proceed The announcement is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 36 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Reminders Reminders is a substitute for those sticky notes or post it notes which your use to remember your tasks for the day You can also add reminders from the Request module to close certain requests or the pending tasks specified for a request can be added as a reminder Add New Reminder To add new tasks to your reminders list 1 Click on Reminders link to open My Reminders pop up Contacts Admin Reports Dashboards O Attend the demo on Sep 24 2010 11 00 AM Call Thomas to i P Ge
64. add only private custom views Edit Custom Views To edit a custom view 1 Click the edit icon beside the filter name you wish to edit 2 From Edit Custom View page edit the details 3 Click Save You can also add a new custom view by clicking Save and Add New button Delete Custom Views To delete custom views 1 Select the check box beside the custom views to be deleted The administrator has the privilege to create and delete public views 2 Click Delete button A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The Custom View is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 156 Customizing Contract List View ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to customize the contract list view page by including columns of your choice To customize columns displayed in the list view 1 Click on the Contracts tab in the header pane to open the contract list view page 2 Click on Column Chooser icon AR The available columns that can be displayed in the list view pops up The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box Contracts gt Created in the last 3 months Created in the last 3 months New Contract Delete 1 11 of select box Edit oO Contract Name Account Contract Name 3 Q ER i t TT Service Contract Acme Co Account Name O G7 Maintenance Contract Acme Co Support Plan Support Type CT Status TT amp M
65. and IT Each Business Units can have their own customers Accounts and each customer can have multiple branches Sub Accounts The Accounts and Sub accounts can have their own contacts Customer Contacts who will be raising the requests Ce kl Business Units acme reen a d i dh Sun IN iN 2 Branches Client Customers Ge 2 2222 Subscribers Before getting into the configurations and modules based on departments let us understand the roles and privileges offered to a support representative in departments Support Representative Ability to be associated to multiple departments and assigned with different roles for every department Moona Administrator All the business units is governed by a global administrator who will have a wholesome view of all the business unit operations ZOHO Corporation 17 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide KM Unit Administrator Each Business Unit can have its own Business Unit Administrator who will the rights to maintain the different accounts sub accounts and other related operations of the business unit If you have enabled multi tendency on installing ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus the configuration wizard opens to view the following tabs e Manage Business Units e Business Unit Settings e Global Settings Manage Business Units You can manage and organize all your Business Units from this tab Manage Busine
66. and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 320 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Response response uri api xml closeRequest status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml closeRequest status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation closeRequest is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml closeRequest gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Request ID of the request gt lt input type submit name submit value
67. available in the database 4 Ifthe details such as Account Sub Account Phone Email and Mobile of the selected contact is specified then the same appears in the request template form If the details are not specified then you can do the same in the respective fields Select the Product Name from the drop down Select the Category Sub Category and Item from the drop down 5 6 7 Specify the Subject for the task This field is mandatory 8 Specify relevant information about the task in the given Description field 9 To attach a file to the task template click Attach a File button to attach files 10 Click Next gt gt button for Task Scheduling ZOHO Corporation 240 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Scheduled Request To schedule the request select the time frame from the listed options Daily Schedule To run a daily maintenance task click Daily Schedule radio button 1 Select the Time at which the maintenance task should be scheduled from the drop down 2 Select the Date on when the maintenance task should be scheduled from the Calendar button 3 Save the details Weekly Schedule To run a weekly maintenance task click Weekly Schedule radio button Select the day of the week by enabling the check box beside the day of the week Else if you wish to schedule on all days of the week then click Everyday check box 3 Select the Time frame to schedule the task from the dr
68. by time for a request To set the organization s operational hours 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click on Operational Hours icon s under Contract Settings block Contract Settings Operational Hours Operational Hours Mandatory Field Working time To specify your working hours Select a start and end time Round the clock 24 hours or Start Time 09 00 ei End Time 18 v 00 el Select Operational hours Working days Please select working days of the HelpDesk Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Fj Saturday EF Sunday Save 3 You can specify your working hours as either Round the clock or you can select the Operational Hours from the Start Time and End Time drop down 4 Now select the days that your organization works by selecting the check boxes provided beside the days of the week 5 Click Save At any point if you wish not to modify the operational hours then click Reset If you have already set the operational hours and now you wish to modify the same you still need to follow the same procedure as specified above But in this case when you click Operational Hours from the Admin Home page it will open the Operational Hours form with the details that have been set earlier You can make the necessary modifications and then click on Save ZOHO Corporation 271 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Holidays Your
69. completed and closed If the support rep has permission to view All or All in group amp assigned to him the requests raised in SupportCenter Plus then the following options is available to the support rep ZOHO Corporation 67 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Open Requests Lists all the open requests irrespective of the support rep Requests On Hold All the requests that are kept on hold irrespective of the support rep is listed under this option Overdue Requests Displays all the requests that have exceeded the due by time irrespective of the support rep Requests Due Today Lists all the requests that are due for the day irrelevant of the support rep Pending Requests Lists all the unfinished requests irrelevant of the support rep Completed Requests Displays all the closed requests irrelevant of the support rep All Requests Lists all requests on all status say closed pending open and so on ZOHO Corporation 68 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Custom Views You can create your own customized page to display requests using Custom View option You can specify the criteria to filter the requests accumulated in your requests list view page Thus helping you to sort and view requests based on your requirement e Create Custom View e Manage Views Creating Custom View If you want to view all the High priority requests in the application through Custo
70. configure survey to rate your customer scarification on various parameter that you would like to measure about the support rep and the response quality If the customer replies back to the closed request the status of the request is automatically set as Open and the due by time is applied again ZOHO Corporation 63 Request List View The request list view page organises and displays all the tickets raised into SupportCenter Plus This page includes various useful functionality such as e option to view requests based on filters e customize columns to be displayed in the list view e set the number of requests to be displayed per page e search for requests on entering the request ID e perform major operations on requests from the list view page On clicking the Request tab in the header pane the page redirects to the request list view page Requests gt All Requests All Requests a Search So Refresh this page Never P lew Regue E elete Close erge A to 1 40f4 25 per page V o Subject Contact Name Assigned To Date Q B E upgrade check Mack John Roberts P open Mar 23 2010 02 13 PM a gt amp Software Installation Mark Anthony Jeniffer Doe P Closed Mar 30 amp Printer Problem Andrew Jeniffer Doe Onhold Mar 31 2010 12 51 PM o hw installation Andrew Unassigned Open Mar 31 2010 02 12 PM Representation of Icon in the list view DU A note is added to the reque
71. contract form If you have selected the Support Type as Hour Based and filled in values like No of Hours Cost per hour and Total Cost the same is populated in the new contract form Refer Support Plan to know more 11 Specify the Active Period Start date and End date of the contract using the calender icon 2772 If the End date is not specified then the contract is active for ever This field is mandatory 12 All the available support services configured are listed and the services offered by the selected Support Plan are automatically enabled If required you can Add New Service to the list 13 To attach any file to the contract 1 Click Attach to open Add Remove attachment window 2 Click Browse to locate the file ZOHO Corporation 163 10 11 12 13 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 3 Click Attach The file is attached along with its size 4 Click Done to close the window You can notify users before the contract expires by select Enable Notification check box The Available Users list is displayed from which you need to select users and move them to Selected Users list by clicking gt gt button Specify the days before which the user has to be notified of the contract expiry in the Notify before field You also have an option to specify the hours before which the user has to be notified of the contract expiry in the Notify before field Save the details The ne
72. customized video wid V About this widget Widget Name Description Paste HTML snippet Plain text lt object width 480 height 385 gt lt param name movie value http www youtube com v 6MGe 1VYLCw fs 1 amp amp hl en_US gt lt param gt lt param name allowFullScreen value true gt Save Cancel ZOHO Corporation 357 Appendix This topic explains the features that are not grouped under any of the modules but can be used from the application e System Log Viewer e Contacting ZOHO Corportation ZOHO Corporation 358 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide System Log Viewer You can view the error logs generated by the SupportCenter Plus application online J Note You can also view the error logs in the file name serverout0O txt found under C AdventNet ME SupportCenter server default log To view the error logs from the application 1 Log in to the SupportCenter Plus application using your user name and password If you have the permissions to view the support information you will see a Support tab in the header pane 2 Click the Support tab This opens the System Log page 3 Click the System Log Viewer link available in the Support page Viewing Individual Log Error Details To view the individual error details 1 Inthe Error Log list view page click the hyperlinked Error Message This opens the error lo
73. eas 225 Editing and Deleting Category Sub Category Irems cent ee nett tate tana ees 227 Configuring StAtUS iene anena a O iva wed een ce th eagiatiemdid EENE 229 Configuring E MEET 230 eigene Be EE EEN Configuring PRIOMEY EE 232 Request Additional Fields 233 Request Field PermissiOns ii cccics Hantie EA Ng ENN EES NENNEN AEN averse ie eeaeeriaes 234 Request ClOSING RUES rnrn ndini ninina an REENEN KEE KELASE ened arencerands 235 Request Template NEE ERENNEEN nea EEE EEEE EERE EEEE 236 Sched led REQUESTS rinaire aa Mais ege aaia tae 240 Notification Rules 1 2 0 0 cece ener tenner e eens 243 Configuring Business Rules cceece eee eee eee ee eee eee nae e ae teeta enaes 244 Time Entry Te cei cence cote NEEN SEN SE KN ERNEST SEVEN EEN REENEN ee 247 Time Entry Additional Fields 248 Remote ASSISTANCE 0 cece nee eee ee tenn ena eae 249 Remote Assistance Setup 250 Inviting Contacts from Request Details page 251 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus PCCOUME Setting EE 252 Configuring Industrie 253 Configuring Product Types cccece cece e eee ee ee eee eee e teeta ease ae een ee na enaee 254 Product Additional Fields 255 Configuring Product iis 28ese at eeskeg SEH NNN cesses ciewiengs dada ERNEIEREN ANEREN ER 256 Account Additional Fields 257 Sales Additional Fields 258 Schedule CSV Import 259 Customer Portal SettingS cc
74. field Save the details ZOHO Corporation 160 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Contract Details Page The details of the contract added by you while creating the contract are displayed under Contract Details page From this page you can renew the contract when the expires and also print the contract details To view the contract details page 1 Click the Contract tab in the header pane 2 From the List View select Contract Name link of the contract to be viewed The View Contract details page opens Contract Details This block displays details of the contract that was entered at the time of creation The details include the name of the contract contract number name of the user who has created the contract along with the date and time the status of the contract and the date when the contract is going to expire The details also include the services offered in the contract the support plan and the support type Contracts gt View Contract Edit Renew Print Preview H Maintenance Contract Mais Contract Number 56282 Status Active Created On Nov 11 2010 03 19PM Created By administrator Valid Till Sat 11 Dec 2010 Contract Details Contract Name Maintenance Contract Support Plan Gold Account Name Acme Support Type Incident Based Created On Nov 11 2010 03 19 PM No of Incidents 100 Incidents Created By administrator Cost per Incident 10 00 Total Co
75. icon beside the mode name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the mode then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 231 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Priority Priority of a request defines the intensity or importance of the request To open the request priority configuration page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page A r 2 Click the Helpdesk Customizer icon Zei under Helpdesk Settings 3 Click Priority from the left menu The list of available prioritises You can add edit or delete the request priorities Add Priority 1 Click Add New Priority link 2 Enter a unique name to identify the priority in Priority Name field 3 If you wish you can enter the priority Description also 4 Click Save The new priority is added to the already existing list Edit Priority 1 Click the Edit icon beside the priority name you wish to edit 2 In the Edit Priority form modify the required fields 3 Click Save Delete Priority 1 Click the Delete icon beside the priority name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the priority then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 232 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Additional Fields I
76. in the last 3 months Expired in last 30 days Lists all the contracts expired in the last 30 days Expiring in next 7 days Lists all contracts expiring in next 7 days Expiring in next 30 days Lists all contracts expiring in next 30 days Expiring in the next 3 months Lists all contracts expiring in the next 3 months ZOHO Corporation 153 Custom Views You can create your own customized page to display contracts using Custom View option You can specify the criteria to filter the contracts accumulated in your Contract list view page Thus helping you to sort and view contracts based on your requirement e Create Custom View e Manage View Creating Custom View Using Custom Views you can create filters to view all contracts of an Account Manager or contracts beginning from a particular date 1 Click on the Contracts tab in the header pane to open the Contract list view page 2 Click on Create Custom View icon g The Add Custom View page opens Contracts gt All Active Contracts All Active Contracts v Views Contract Views All Active Contracts New Contract Delete All Expired Contracts Created in the last 7 EJ Contract Name Created in the last 30 CO G FacilitiesDesk Maintenance Contract gt Created in the last 3 O Service amp Sales Contract C Contract for ZOHO III Expired in the last 30 gt Expiring in next 7 day IS Maintenance Expiring in next
77. is not listed 2 You can also Edit the contact information g and also View the contact information A 3 If the contact list is lengthy you can search for contacts on entering the contact name in Search Contact List and click Go Alternatively you can choose to view only selected group of contacts by clicking on the alphabets at the top If your on a call with a first time caller then enter the Contact Details like Name Phone and Mobile number and Email address If the account is available then select the same from Account drop down box Else enter the Account name in the field Select the Product to be associated with the request 10 You can also classify the request category by selecting the Category Sub 11 12 13 14 Category and Item If there are any Additional Request details configured under Admin gt Helpdesk Customizer gt Request Additional Fields then enter the same in the respective fields Specify the Subject of the request This field is mandatory Provide a brief description about the request in the Description field If you wish to attach any relevant files to the request then click Attach a file link The Add Remove Attachment window pops up Add Remove Attachment Close Click Browse to select a file You can attach any number of files for a total of 5 M Choose a File Attach Attached Files There are no files attached Done ZOHO Corporation
78. license file and click Open 5 Click Apply If your license has expired then follow the steps given below 1 Save the license file in one of the directories of the server machine 2 Start the server from the command prompt C AdventNet ME SupportCenter bin gt run bat 3 A message prompts for the license file path 4 Enter the full directory path of the license file ZOHO Corporation 15 5 Shutdown the server when it begins to start e Open another command prompt e Go to the bin directory e Run the script e cmd gt sh shutdown sh S After this process you will be able to start the server using the normal mode Start gt Programs gt ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gt Start Server The registration of the SupportCenter Plus application is complete You can continue using the application ZOHO Corporation 16 Configuring Business Units Organizations with various marketing segments can be best thought of as a number of businesses that supports their own set of accounts customers and vendors Hence the customer support operations in these enterprises are complex interconnected and extremely difficult to organize In ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus you can configure individual segment or division as a Business Unit with which you can organize and manage your support team effectively For instance let s take the company Acme Corporation It has 3 Strategic Business Units which include Telecom Retail
79. not want to delete the group then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 284 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Windows Domains You can configure the Windows domains available in your network using ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus When you set up the SupportCenter Plus application and start it for the first time the application will scan your network and identify all the available Windows domain in your network To view the discovered domains 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Ke 2 Click the Windows Domains icon in the Users and Related Settings block The resulting page displays the discovered list of Windows domains You can add edit and delete domains If you find that there are some domains that are missing in the list then you can add those domains manually also Add Domains To add a new Windows domain 1 Click the Add New Domain link 2 Enter the Domain Name The name has to be unique and is mandatory field 3 If you want the domains to be displayed in the login screen when Active directory Authentication is enabled then select the check box beside Public Domain 4 Enter the Domain Controller name for the Active Directory Server 5 Enter the Login Credentials for the domain controller in Username and Password fields 6 If you wish to add any description for the domain enter it in the Description text box 7 Click Save Edit
80. notify the support rep through SMS when a new request or an already existing request is assigned to him her using this option To send an SMS to a support rep Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page Click the Subject link of the request to be replied From the request details page select Reply drop down menu gt SMS the Support Rep option The Mail to Support Rep form pops up 4 The From address is pre populated with the Reply To mail address configured under Mail Configurations under Admin module 5 If the SMS Id of the contact is specified in the application then the same is populated in the To field 6 You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the SMS Ids in CC field 7 If you do not wish to disclose the recipient then specify the SMS Ids in the BCC field 8 The Subject field is pre populated with the request Id 9 The Description contains the contact name due by date and title of the request You can modify the Subject and Description as required 10 Click Attach File s to add files as attachments to the mail 11 Click Send You have an option to Save the request as draft and Save and Send the request for review The email saved as drafts can be viewed edited deleted and sent for review from the request details page ZOHO Corporation 121 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solutions ManageEngine Suppor
81. of the request along with a date and time stamp The name of the person who added the note is also displayed You can add any number of notes to a request The added notes is displayed in the descending order with recently added note first You also have options to edit and delete the notes ZOHO Corporation 99 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding Reminders You have an option to add reminders for a request using Add Reminders option All the pending tasks specific to the request can be added as reminders On adding these reminders get displayed under My Reminders in the Home page To add new task to the reminder list 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to add reminder 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Add Reminder option The Reminders page opens Reminder Attend the demo on softcel Date 2009 09 10 SS Time 03 00 PM Remind SE me ihr WW before Add Cancel 3 Specify the summary in the provided text field Select the Date and Time for the reminder The date field is set to today s date and the time is set by default as 11 00 AM Change the date and time settings To change the date select the calender icon ijand choose the date of your choice From the time drop down box choose the time at which the task is scheduled 5 Select the reminder durat
82. organizations annual holidays can be configured using this option This includes the list of holidays during which your firm would remain closed and is exclusive of the weekends when the firm does not function The holiday list is also used while calculating the due by time of a request To open the holiday configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane ve 2 In the Contract Settings block click the Holidays icon U The list of available holidays is displayed From this page you can add edit and delete holidays Add Holidays Click on Add New Holiday link from the holiday list view page 2 Enter the Date of the holiday using the calender icon l This field is mandatory and should be selected 3 If required you can provide the significance of the holiday in the Description field 4 Click Save The holiday is added to the list At any point if you do not wish to add the holiday and would like to get back to the holiday list click Cancel Edit Holidays 1 In the holiday list view page click the Edit icon beside the holiday Date you wish to edit 2 The holiday form opens with the values populated while adding the holiday Modify the details such as Date and Description 4 Save the changes ad Delete Holidays 1 In the holiday list view page click the Delete icon beside the holiday Date you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click Ok to proceed with the delete operation The hol
83. performed are based on the parameter operation and is sent to a url via HTTP POST or GET method The url format is as shown below http lt servername gt lt port number gt api lt output format gt lt operation module gt apikey lt apikey gt amp lt params gt Supported Operations The operations that can be performed through API are e Request Related Operations adding request details viewing existing request details closing requests viewing time entry details and view request description details e Account Contacts Related Operations adding account details adding contact details viewing existing account details viewing existing contact details and view product details e Solution Related Operations View solution details Note intel To get started with the integration developers should first assign a role to the API application and generate an API Key Click here to view the details on accessing SupportCenter Plus API ZOHO Corporation 304 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide API Settings in SupportCenter Plus Before getting started with the API integration certain criteria should be configured in SupportCenter Plus such as 1 Defining the API Application 2 Assigning specific Roles to the API application and 3 Generating the API Key To access the API configuration wizard in SupportCenter Plus 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the confi
84. search string s are displayed 2 You cannot search for a solution based on any of the date fields of the solution Note 1 The search would return the results for any of the text fields of the solution DN ZOHO Corporation 132 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding New Solution The solutions module is a knowledge base with resolutions for various problems encountered by your help desk team You can also document useful information while resolving an issue and save in the knowledge base The solutions can be grouped under various topics to organize and locate the solutions easily Adding new solutions The new solution form can be accessed by two ways in SupportCenter Plus application a Add New drop down b Solutions tab Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Solution form the home page Le Add New p Request Reminder Task Is Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact To configure the New Solution form go to Step 3 in Solution tab Solution Tab 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page Click on New Solution button From the New Solution form specify the Subject of the solution The subject can be a summary of the complete solution in one line that will exactly tell what the solution is all about This field is mandatory
85. status of the support rep is shown based on the Online Status settings in Admin module For the contact to view the support teams availability information People option in Settings under the Admin module should be enabled Else the Support Team tab will not be available ZOHO Corporation 28 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Home Dashboard My View Global View Support Team administrator Phone 1234455 Email 1 Online Status Online Change Image Jake Thomas Phone 925 852 2564 Email jake acme com Online Status Online Change Image Henry William Phone 925 852 2645 Email henry acme com Online Status Offline Change Image ZOHO Corporation George Mallory Phone 983 788 3471 Email george acme com Online Status Online Change Image Marc Anthony Phone 925 852 2588 Email marc acme com Online Status Online Change Image John Mathew Phone 925 852 2592 Email john acme com Online Status Offline Changs Image 29 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Log a Call Log a Call is an instant mode to create new requests or view existing requests when you are on a call with the customer With log a call option support reps can conduct a search for existing Customers Accounts on entering the contact name account name phone and mobile number job title and contract name Also
86. the Contacts available in SupportCenter Plus e Recently Added Contacts Lists the most recently added Contacts es Contacts without Account Lists all the Contacts that are not associated to an account e Primary Contacts Lists all the contacts that are associated to an account and can view all the requests raised from their accounts e Unapproved Contacts Lists all the contacts that require approval from the administrator For instance if a non logged in user raised a request from the self service portal then the user is added as an unapproved contact e Registered Contacts New Users who have registered for SupportCenter Plus through the Customer portal are listed under this category These contacts need to be approved by the administrator ZOHO Corporation 194 Custom Views You can create your own customized Contacts list view page The Contacts is sorted based on the filter criteria you specify while creating the custom view Thus helping you to sort and view the Contacts based on your requirement e Create Custom View e Manage View Creating Custom View If you want to view all the Contacts from a particular account 1 Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the Contacts list view page 2 Click on Create Custom View icon The Add Custom View page opens NITTLER ed ET dE TTT Contacts Contacts gt Recently Added Contacts Recently Added Contacts w Views dp All Contacts gt Recentl
87. the Date Time tab 2 Specify the Label for the additional field 3 Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings These additional fields will appear while adding a request under Additional Request Details block To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save ZOHO Corporation 233 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Field Permissions With Request Field Permission you can customize the request form for the contact login You can select specific fields that can be set and viewed by the contact while raising a new request The fields in Request Field Permission includes the request field parameters and the additional fields configured in the application To select the fields enable the check box beside them Please not that the selected fields appear in the Contact View of the Request NOTE Template It is recommended to first select the field permission and then customize the request template Also the fields such as Created Date Due Date Responded Date Completed Date Time Elapsed and Response Dueby Time are visible if selected only while the request ZOHO Corporation 234 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Closing Rules With Request Closing R
88. the available roles You can add edit and delete roles from this page Adding a Role Click the Add New Role link Enter a unique name for the role in Role Name filed The Role Name is to identify the role and is a mandatory field 3 Set the access permissions for the role To set the access permission just select the check boxes beside the access levels defined for each of the modules of the application Role List Add New Role Mandatory Field Role Name My Role TEA Requests M O Solutions 5 M M o 7 Contracts o O o oO O Accounts o kl oO O Access Reports o O o oO O poe Requests support rep is allowed to view all O all in group amp assigned te him O Assigned to him Support Reps allowed to Approve Solution V Support Reps allowed to Edit DueBy Date and First Respose DueBy Time kel Support Reps allowed to Merge Requests Description Save Cancel ZOHO Corporation 274 8 9 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Say you want to provide Add permissions for the modules Account and Solution and only View permissions for the Request module Select the check box below Add against the Accounts and Solutions modules For the request module select the check box below View Selecting the Add option automatically enables View permissions also You can also provide restrict access to support reps from viewing all requests in the application Select the appr
89. where you have all the information The data should be sent to the SupportCenter_Home csv_files directory ZOHO Corporation 259 No CSV file found under the SupportCenter Plus CS directory To automate this process itis advised to write a script that would send the changed information of the external database as a CSY file to the SupportCenter_Home csv_files directory ap Fields No CS fields available for mapping 4 Once the CSV file is available in the CSV directory CSV File Name gets displayed automatically in un editable format Specify the File Encoding format from the combo box Click the Show Fields button to map the fields Map the fields To schedule the settings click the Enable radio button Select the Time duration from the combo box eS SE Select the Date from the calender button and also select the start schedule time from the drop down list 10 If you like to notify the support rep on the failure of the CSV import update then click Notification check box 11 Save the settings ZOHO Corporation 260 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Customer Portal Settings With Customer Portal Settings you can transform the entire web portal page into a flexible and feasible customer portal You can customize the portal by selecting de selecting the options you wish to provide to your customers To access the customer portal 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane
90. which the a resolution is provided to a request and the status is set to Resolved 6 You also have an option to resolve requests irrespective of the operational hours and holidays by Enabling Should be resolved irrespective of Operational Hours By selecting this option you will be overriding the operational hours of your organization and the due by time is calculated from the creation time without taking into consideration the holidays and operational hours 7 If the request is not responded within the specified Response Time you can set escalation levels for notification to higher level support reps To escalate requests when the response time elapses 1 Click Enable Level 1 Escalation 2 Choose the support rep to whom the ticket needs to be escalated by clicking Choose button 3 You can specify the actions to be carried out while performing the escalation from Choose Action drop down 4 Set the Date and Time Before or After the escalation 8 Similarly if the request is not resolved within the specified Resolution Time you can set the up to 4 levels of escalation to support reps ZOHO Corporation 269 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus If response time is elapsed then escalate V Enable Level 1 Escalation Escalate to Ticket Owner Eet Set Priority as v High Choose e rietalhi heitan D a E EA Choose Action EE Days Time 2 wl Hours 0 wl Minutes
91. will attend the meeting Add Note Alternatively if the participants are SupportCenter Plus users then they can log into the application select the event and respond to the invitation Recording Invited Participants The Invited Participants block is visible to the user who has created the event This block is to keep a track of the participants who Will Attend the event Not Attend the event and those who May Attend the event By default the creator of the event is listed in the Will Attend sub tab The participants who have not responded to the mail are listed in Not Responded sub tab So with these tabs you can keep a track of the participants attending the event ZOHO Corporation 58 Invited Participants Will Attend 3 Name administrator Jake Thomas Bob Adams Not Attend Gi ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide May Attend 8 Not Responded 8 Comment Attending Will be attending the meeting Will be 10 mins late but will attend the meeting ZOHO Corporation 59 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Requests Helpdesk Support Reps receive requests from a variety of sources email phone calls forums web portal from various regions across the globe Tracking prioritizing and resolving these requests can become a nightmare without a central point of reference for all requests Requests Module in ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus helps y
92. you wish to edit 2 In the Edit Level form you can modify the name and description of the level 3 Click Save At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Level 1 Click the Delete icon beside the level name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the level then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 230 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Mode Helpdesk Support Reps receive requests from a variety of sources email phone calls forums web portal and so on All these modes can be configured in SupportCenter Plus application 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page SH 2 Click on HelpDesk Customizer icon Zei under HelpDesk Settings 3 Click Mode from the left menu The Mode List page is displayed You can add edit or delete the request mode Add Mode 1 Click Add New Mode link 2 Enter the Mode Name 3 If you want you can enter the mode Description also 4 Click Save The new mode is added to the existing list Edit Mode 1 Click the Edit icon beside the mode name you wish to edit In the Edit Mode form you can modify the name and description of the mode 3 Click Save At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel N Delete Mode 1 Click the Delete
93. 09 10 45 32 Closed on 18 Nov 2009 17 26 37 Surveyed By Sharon Harper 4 Your opinion on our service O Poor O Good O Excellent O Average 2 Your opinion on the turn around time of the support re Poor O Good O Excellent O Average 3 Your opinion on the product O Poor O Good O Excellent O Average Any other Comments or suggestion Thank you for taking part in this survey Submit Cancel ZOHO Corporation 291 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Once the contact has answered the survey questions and hit the Submit button the result of the survey is listed under Survey Results Once the survey is submitted the response cannot be changed User Survey Settings Survey Results Survey Results List 8 Created Completed P Subject Contact Name Date Support Rep Date Ratings My Iphone displ Sharon Harper 29 Oct 2009 Jake Thomas 29 Oct 2009 12 0 29 Oct 2009 29 Oct 2009 9 0 My Iphone displ Sharon Harper ZOHO Corporation 292 Survey Preview You also have an option to preview the User Survey form that will appear to the user To preview the User Survey form 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Survey Preview icon LQ under User Survey Settings The Preview Survey page opens with the list of configured questions and levels ZOHO Corporation 293 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator
94. 1 41 AMView forever ONOOOOOOoO0d L A demo for softcecl i Everyone Sep 14 2009 11 33 AMSep 29 2009 11 33 AM A webinar to be conducted for eServer Chennai t Everyone Sep 9 2009 02 34 PM Sep 16 2009 02 34 PM Nortel network will be down due to maintenance fro Sa Support RepSep 9 2009 02 32 PM Sep 22 2009 02 33 PM A demo for softcecl Sa Support RepSep 1 2009 02 35 PM Sep 10 2009 02 36 PM demo for softcecl upper Rep 2 By default all the announcements are shown You can select the announcements to displayed in the column view from Filtering Showing combo box You can view announcements that is Currently Shown or announcements that is To be shown in the home page or announcement that is Already displayed ZOHO Corporation 35 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus From this page you can add a new announcement edit a announcement and bulk delete announcements To view the details of a announcement click on the title of the announcement either from the announcement block or from manage announcements page Contacts can view only the current announcements Edit an Announcement You can edit an announcement either from the manage announcements page or while viewing the announcement detail To edit an announcement from the announcement pop up Select the Title of the announcement you wish to edit from Manage Announcements page The details of the announcement opens in
95. 14 Status Gi Pending Approval 1 1 Collapse Sent To shawn acme com Status Pending Approval 1 Pending Approval on 29 Sep 2009 12 27 14 Sent On 29 Sep 2009 12 26 05 Status EN Denied 1 1 Expand Sent On 29 Sep 2009 10 56 56 Status Approved 1 1 Expand ZOHO Corporation 110 View Contact Details While attending to a request you might want to contact the customer for additional information To view the contact details 1 2 3 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page Click the Subject link of the request for which you want to view the contact details From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt View Contact Details option The Contact Details page pops up g Sharon Harper Engineer E mail sharon acme com Phone 925 852 2588 Mobile 925 852 2592 Account Name Acme Corporations Description Engineer Contact Details pop up contains details such as name of the contact job title email address phone and mobile number of the contact Account to which the contact belongs and Description Alternatively you can also view the contact details by clicking on the contact name in the request details page as shown Edit Close Assign ID 77 Iphone display is not working Created On Sep 29 2009 12 55 PM Sa baron Harper Acme Corporations L 925 852 2580 925 852 2592 J Send Invite Request Account Info Resol
96. 30 da IS Support Expiring in next 3 mon IS Contract for Acme 3 In the Add Custom View page specify a View Name like Account Manager Filter This field is mandatory 4 If you are the administrator and want this custom view to be available only when you log in select the check box beside Make this view as private custom view The custom view is made private By default the custom view for an administrator is public If you are a support rep without administrator login privilege then by default the created custom view is private The option to Make this view as private custom view is not available 5 In the Advance Filtering block select the criteria to be filtered from Column drop down along with its matching Criteria For instance select Account Manager from Column drop down and is from criteria 6 Click on Choose button ZOHO Corporation 154 7 From Select Column Data pop up choose the account manager from the list 8 Click Add to Filter button to save the filter criteria details The filter criteria is listed in Filter Set block 9 If you wish to add more filter conditions to this view then select the required column criteria amp conditions of the filter 10 If there are more than two criteria specify AND or OR conditions by enabling either of the two radio buttons 11 Click Save Click Save and Add New to save and add another custom view The Custom View is now displayed under Views in the Con
97. 7 If you have configured any additional fields for the support rep then the same is displayed under Additional Support Rep Details block Enter the relevant information 8 Provide login access to the support rep by selecting Enable Login for this Support Rep This displays the Assign Role block jus below the login name and password fields 9 Enter the Login Name and Password Enter the password again in the Re type Password field All these fields are mandatory if login is enabled Also note that the login name needs to be unique 10 Only on enabling login for the support rep will the Assign Roles to the Support Rep drop down appear Choose the role from the drop down The support rep can be assigned with Administrator privilege Business Unit Administration privileges or with the roles configured in the application ZOHO Corporation 278 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Note If you have configured multi tendency through Business Units please note that a EN support rep can be assigned with only one role for a Business Unit To assign Support Reps to multiple Business Units and assign roles to the same configure the support reps under Admin gt Global Settings gt Support Reps Click Save Import Users from Active Directory You can import all your support reps instantly if their details are configured in the Active Directory 1 From the support rep list view click Import from A
98. 77 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus 1 Click Browse button and select the file to be attached from the file chooser window Click Open button 2 Click Attach button The selected file is listed under Attached Files along with size of the file 3 If you have more than one file to attach repeat steps 1 and 2 Ensure that the total size of the attachments does not exceed 5 MB Click Done The selected files are attached to the request 15 Enter the email address of the CC recipients in the field provided The CC recipient will receive email on the conversation between the support rep and the contact You can add more than one CC recipient separating each email ID with a comma Click here to know more on Auto CC 16 Click Add request button If the Contact and Account information is not entered in the application a pop up message appears confirming to add the contact and account details as part of the request Click Ok to proceed The request is added to the request list ZOHO Corporation 78 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Auto CC Recipient For crucial requests it becomes utmost import to inform your higher officials on the progress and development of the request The Auto CC recipient feature is a one time addition of the CC ed recipients after which the conversations between the support rep and contact is notified to the CC recipients The Auto CC recipient op
99. A e Scheduled Requests Gi amp e Notification Rules e Business Rules e Time Entry Type ES E e Time Entry Additional Fields Ed Te e Remote Assistance Setup ZOHO Corporation 213 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Mail Server Settings In order to fetch and send mails from the application you need to configure the Mail Server Settings You need to set both the Incoming and Outgoing mail server settings to send and receive mails without any problems To configure mail server settings 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page o 2 Click the Mail Server Settings icon Ka under the Helpdesk Settings block The Mail Server Settings page opens to view the Incoming Outgoing and Spam Filter tabs e Incoming Mail Settings e Outgoing Mail Settings e Spam Filter Incoming Mail Settings 1 Click on Incoming tab 2 Specify the Server Name IP Address from where the mails needs to be fetched 3 Specify the Login credentials to the server in the User Name and Password fields 4 Select the type of Email that needs to be fetched into the application from Email Type drop down Say POP IMAP POP3S IMAPS 5 The default Port for the email type is pre filled 6 You can schedule the time in minutes to fetch the mails in Fetch mails every field 7 If you require you can enable Transport Layer Security by selecting the check box besid
100. Acknowledge Account Manager by Email WZ When 4 new request is received Customize template On receipt of the email reply V When the request is updated When the request is closed 3 To enable or disable any of the notification rules select or de select the check box beside each of the rules 4 For certain notifications like Alerting support reps when a new request is created and Notify Support Reps when solution is created or Modified you need to choose the support rep s to be notified by clicking Choose button and selecting the support reps from the pop up window Click Ok 5 Click Save Customizing Templates You can customize the message template which will be sent for various events such as replying to a request escalation of SLA notifying support reps task and event reminder notification announcements and so on You can also customize the message template for each of the notifications To customize the template 1 Click on the Customize Template link of the notification The template opens in a editable format as shown below ZOHO Corporation 243 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Reply a request Compose mail subject and message here Subject Re Request ID Requestld Title CreatedDate _ Choose Subject variables Choose Option Af Request ID Created Date Due By Date Response DueBY Time wi Message F E BZU Choose content variabl
101. By Priority Pie chart depicting the number of requests in the various priority configured in the application Request By Category Pie chart depicting the number of requests in assigned to the categories configured in the application ZOHO Corporation 352 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Average Resolution Time compliance by Support Rep Bar diagram depicting the average resolution time taken by Support Reps to close a request Average Resolution Time compliance by Level Bar diagram depicting the average resolution time taken to close request based on level Average Resolution Time compliance by Priority Bar diagram depicting the average resolution time taken to close requests based on priority Average Resolution Time compliance by Category Bar diagram depicting the average resolution time taken to close a request based on category Requests Assigned Contracts Vs Requests Not Assigned Contracts Pie chart depicting the number of requests assigned to a contract and the number of requests that are not assigned to a contract Requests Assigned Products Vs Requests Not Assigned Products Pie chart depicting the number of requests assigned to a product and the number of requests that are not assigned to a product Account and Contact Widgets Accounts and Contacts Summary This widget shows the number of Accounts added in the last 30 days the number of contacts added in the last 30 days and the numbe
102. Corporation 238 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Request Preview On customizing the request form for both the support rep as well as the contact you can see a preview of both the logins using this option From the Request Template list view page click the template name to preview Support Rep View By default the request template form for a support rep is displayed You can drag and drop fields in the canvas re arrange the fields add remove and set properties for the field Contact View To view the request template form for a contact login click the Contact View tab in the request template form The fields that should be available in the contact view is configured in Request Field Permissions To add additional fields in the form layout configure the same under Request Additional Fields Editing Request Template 1 In the request template list view page click on the Edit icon Z beside the template you wish to edit 2 The Request Template form opens with the values pre filled while creating the template 3 Modify the details and Save the changes Deleting Request Template 1 In the request template list view page click on the Delete icon LZ beside the template to delete 2 A confirmation message appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The request template is delete from the list ZOHO Corporation 239 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Schedul
103. Description field Select the Category from the drop down This field is also mandatory 5 Click Save button You can see the sub category getting listed under the selected category Create New Item 1 Click New Item button Or Click Add new item icon beside the sub category title in the list view 2 Specify the Item name This field is mandatory ZOHO Corporation 225 Specify relevant information about the newly created item in the Description field Select the Sub Category for the item from the drop down This field is also mandatory Click Save button ZOHO Corporation 226 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing and Deleting Category Sub Category Items You can edit and delete category sub category and Items from the List View 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Ca Click on HelpDesk Customizer icon Ze under HelpDesk Settings Click Category from the menu on the left hand side of the page The Category List view page opens where you can edit and delete category sub category and items Edit Category 1 Click the Edit icon beside the category name 2 Modify the details and Save the changes Edit Sub Category 1 Click the Title of the category in the category list page This opens the sub category details page Click the Edit icon This opens the edit sub category form Modify the details and Save th
104. Domains 1 Click on the Edit icon beside the Domain Name you wish to edit 2 In the Edit Domain form you can modify the name of the domain login name password and description of the domain as shown below Domain List Add New Domain Mandatory Field Domain Name ACME Public Domain Note When ActiveDirectory Authentication is enabled Public Domains will be displayed in the Login Screen Domain Controller acme des Login Name administrator Description Save Cancel ZOHO Corporation 285 3 Click Save to save the changes performed At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Domains 1 Click the Delete icon beside the Domain Name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion The domain gets deleted from the list If you do not wish to delete the domain then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 286 User Survey Settings You can easily record your customer satisfaction level on various key parameters that you would like to measure about the support team and their response quality by conducting a survey upon changing the ticket status to Closed You can define your own survey questions and the also set the frequency of conducting the survey The various survey related configurations and the survey related actions are e Survey Settings Le e Define sume e Sendin
105. Edit Request from List View To edit requests from the list view page 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on the Edit icon beside the request title to edit 3 The request form opens in editable format with the values populated during creating the request 4 Modify the details and specify the Reason for Updating the Request This reason will be shown in the History tab of the request 5 Click Update button to save the changes From the request list view you have an option to edit more than one request This comes in handy when there are a group of requests with similar issues Instead of editing the requests one by one you can edit the details in a single shot To perform bulk edit 1 From the request list view page select the check box beside the request you wish to edit 2 Click on Edit button The edit request page opens to display the request id of the requests that are grouped together to edit 3 You can edit the request details owner details product and category details of the request 4 Specify the Reason for Updating the Request in the given field The specified reason will be shown in the History tab in request details page 5 Click Update button to save the changes Edit Request from Details page To edit requests from the request details page 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the requ
106. Eh From System On Sep 30 2009 10 14 AM St gt From Sharon Harper On Sep 30 2009 10 27 AM ar gt E From System On Sep 30 2009 10 27AM Representation of Icons in the Conversation block amp select this icon to view the details of a conversation ER reply sent by the support rep to the contact e response sent by the contact no file attachments in the conversation DI file is attached in the conversation thread amp conversations between the support reps These are private conversations and cannot be viewed by the contact E conversation between the support rep and the contact These are public conversation and can be viewed by the contact Making a Public conversation as Private Public Conversations by default are conversations between the support rep and the contact and can be viewed under View Contact Conversation You also have an option to make the public conversations as private 1 Click on the Public icon D 2 Select Mark as Private link ZOHO Corporation 94 View Contact Conversations View All Conversations gt E gt From Jake Thomas Mark as gt E gt From Jake Thomas 24 private gt 3 D From Sharon Harper On Sep 30 2009 10 27 AM ar 3 A dialog box appears stating the conversation status has been changed 4 Click Ok to proceed The conversation is made private and is indicated with the d ry Private icon E Making a Pr
107. Enter the password in the New Password field This is mandatory field Click Reset Password The pop up refreshes with a success message Click Ok to close the window Note To intimate the change of password to the requester automatically once you ini have reset the password you need to enable Send Self Service login details option in Notifications Rules under Admin tab Delete Contact To delete bulk contact information from the application 1 Click the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contact list view page 2 Select the check box beside the name of the contact you wish to delete 3 Click the Delete button A confirmation dialog pop up 4 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion of the contact information Alternatively you can also delete contacts from the contact details page To know more refer Delete Contact ZOHO Corporation 207 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Reconcile Contacts Contacts with multiple entries in SupportCenter Plus can be reconciled into one Say for instance a contact sends a request from mail address as sharon acme com and replies to the request from another mail address as sharonharper acme com then these two mail address are considered as two different contacts in SupportCenter Plus If you are aware that the same user is sending mails from different mail addresses then you can reconcile the two users as one And in future if you receive m
108. High from list of priority by clicking Choose button If you want to select multiple values press Shift or Ctrl key The selected values appear in the text field beside the choose button 3 Click Add to Rules button to add the defined rule to the rule set You can add another criteria for Category in the same manner as explained above 4 Select Match ANY of the following OR radio button if you do not want all the criteria to be checked before applying the SLA By default the radio button Match ALL of the following AND is selected ZOHO Corporation 268 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Support Plan Gold v SLA Rules When a new request arrives Match ALL of the following AND Match ANY of the following OR Criteria Category v is Replacement Query Choose Add to Rules Rules Set Rule a 2 Priority is High Any Request matching the above rules should be responded within 00 Days 4 wl Hours 0 sl Minutes Any Request matching the above rules should be resolved within 00 Days 8 wei Hours 0 ei Minutes Should be resolved irrespective of operational hours 5 Set the Response Time and Resolution Time in terms of Days Hours and Minutes Response Time denotes the time within which the support rep should respond to the request Automated emails generated from the system will not be considered as a response Resolution Time or due by time denotes the time within
109. I Application is deleted from the list view ZOHO Corporation 307 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Related Operations While invoking the request related operations through API the operation defined are based on the parameter value and the developer needs to submit a request to the url via HTTP POST or GET method NOTE Before proceeding with the request related operations and its corresponding parameters please note that the parameters are case sensitive and should be used as defined The following operations can be performed on a request through API e Add Request e View Read Request e View Read Request Description e Add Notes for a request e View Read Notes for a request e View Read Time Entry for a request e Close Request Adding Request URL Format The URL format for the Request operation Add For xmi output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addRequest For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json addRequest Parameters The parameters that needs to be passed via HTTP method for adding a new request are as follows Parameter Value Description email string _ Email address of the contact product string Product for which the request is raised ZOHO Corporation 308 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide status string Status o
110. Im 1 250f46 bk W i 5 per page iY 10 per page y Time Assigned To 25 Priority 9 B 4 2009 01 26 PM Henry William 4 Custom and Manage the Views Customize the page to display the requests using Custom View option You can create criteria to filter requests accumulated in the request list view page Thus sorting and viewing requests based on your requirements Refer Custom Views to know more e P create filters to customize and organize your request list view The filters created can be made public or private e ZE View edit and delete customized views ZOHO Corporation 65 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 5 Request based on filters View specific group of requests through pre defined filters 6 View and Add Notes to a request Select on the notes icon to view and add notes to a request instantly from the list view page Public notes are marked as whereas private notes are marked in P Refer Notes for more information eT 2 administrator d on 23 Sep 2009 While merging requests from the list view the older request is taken as the parent request and the new request is the child request administrator on 2 2 2009 12102 While merging requests from the list view the older request is taken as the parent rannact ond tha naw raniect ic tha child raniact unable to reach the customer Will call him tomorrow C Show this notes to Contact also C E mail the support re
111. Manage Custom View icon The Custom View page opens listing all the created custom views e indicates the custom view is public and can be viewed by all users e T indicates the custom view is private and can be viewed only by the creator of the custom view ZOHO Corporation 128 Solutions gt Custom Views Custom Views New Custom View Delete E Filter Name Created By o g S General topics administrator TIS S Topic Templates administrator Note 1 Iif you are the administrator then you can view all your customized private and ind public views 2 If you are a support rep then you can add only private custom views Edit Custom Views To edit a custom view 1 Click the edit icon beside the filter name you wish to edit 2 From Edit Custom View page edit the details 3 Click Save You can also add a new custom view by clicking Save and Add New button Delete Custom Views To delete custom views 1 Select the check box beside the custom views to be deleted The administrator has the privilege to create and delete public views 2 Click Delete button A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The Custom View is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 129 Customizing Solution List View ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to customize the solution list view page by including columns of your choice To customize columns displayed
112. ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Support Reps Support Reps handle and resolve the various incoming requests from customers Support Reps are defined with access privileges and roles to execute a set of tasks ona daily basis You can add support reps manually or if their details are configured in the Active Directory you can import their details into the application 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Support Reps icon 28 under Users and Related Settings block The Support Rep list view page opens where you can add import edit and delete support reps e Add New Support Reps e Import Support Reps from Active Directory e Editing Support Reps e Deleting support Reps Add New Support Rep Click the Add New Support Rep link Specify the Personal Details of the support rep such as the Name Employee ID and Job Title The Name is a mandatory field 3 Enter the Contact Information of the support rep like Email I D Phone and Mobile number You can also enter the SMS Mail ID if the support rep has one Enter the Cost Details of the support rep in the Cost per hour field 5 While configuring Telephony Server Settings you can enable incoming call alert as a screen pop up by selecting the check box beside Enable Screen Pop 6 Enter the SIP User along with the Extension Number The SIP User is account name registered in the IP PBX
113. NRERRERKNEEIREEANEER RER ER EERE KEE ERR KEEN ENEE RER 60 Request List VIEW i deed aeria a ENEE Eed Eed Ne e 64 Requests Based on FUERE sgegdgENeR ege de e taudossubossadedueune todduuseeeunncdaune 67 Cu st m E 69 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Customizing Request List View 72 Search REQUESTS E 73 Creating New Requests sssssrrrssssertenttt tt trtn rrr n rnnr rnn nn ann E EEE EE EEEE EEEn 75 Auto CC R ipieNt ee Eet geet Zeie EE ee AE gece 79 Editing Requests E 81 Deleting eebe areae rn EE EAEN EERE 82 Closing E E 83 Merging REQUGSIS ER 84 Assigning Requests to Support Rep 87 Request Details Page EN 89 Request ee e EE 94 Start Stop Request DIME sais ssee asada dian outeniiesavenieeieiensepe aise eens 97 Adding NOES siocccosaeexsessanyyiasnsseuee vans annaa E AE AE ATE ERNEA 99 Adding En le EE 100 Duplicate eeneg EEN ees 101 Printing EE 102 laten GE 103 Add New Canned Response cece cette eee ee eee nent eee ne teen ea ee enenas 103 Editing Canned Response cece teeter eee nee nee nett tenes 104 Deleting Canned Response eee eee eee ee eee eee eee tenet e eta eae 104 Replying via Canned Response cee eee eee eee eee cee eee een a teats 105 Adding RESOMMUOMN EE 106 Search SolUtIONS antes s den snaroveadearexeeacdeausgustenenucavbeuaddauvaunesseuuuarvoxsaceaye 108 Submit ege EE 109 View Contact RE 111 View Requests EE 112 Replying to the KEE sisri ee E 113 Forwarding
114. S New Contact Delete Reconcile Contacts Acme Corporations Associate i Name amp Email Phone Account Sub A fF Kate Hinks kate nauk com 88888 Acme Corporations ES Kurt Rusell kurt xxx com 231232454 ZOHO Corporations E Mark Adams mark acme com 1 925 924 9800 Acme Corporations FJ E Meg Ryan meg acme com 67293202 Acme Inc C G Mike Smith mike acme com 234 679 8787 Acme Corporations CO ES Paul Finch paul acme com 234 679 8787 Acme Corporations O SS Sharon Harper sharon acme com 925 852 2588 Acme Corporations TT Sharon Philips sharonp acme com 983 788 347 Acme Corporations ZOHO Corporation 183 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Add New Contact 4 5 Click on New Contact button The Contact Details page drops down where you can specify the contact Name E mail ID and Phone number The Name is a mandatory field Specify the access permissions for the contact to view the request by selecting any of the three radio buttons e Their Own Requests only Contact can view only their own requests in the account e All requests from their account Primary Contact Contact can view all the requests in the account e All requests from their account and sub account Contacts can view all the requests from their account and sub accounts Specify the Login details such as the login name and password Save the details Associate Products You can also associate products to an acco
115. SLA rules Using these SLA rules the due by time for a request is applied ZOHO Corporation 150 Contracts List View The contract list view page displays all the active and expired contract configured in SupportCenter Plus application The page includes various useful functionality such as e option to view contracts based on pre filters e customize columns to be displayed in the list view e set the number of contracts to be displayed per page e search for contracts using search string e adding and managing topics On clicking to the Contracts tab in the header pane the page re directs to the contract list view page ManageEngne jusiness ts GENAP started j Prefe s le administrator SupportCenter CC CO eile Contracts BEISSA OIE Te CEET CET vi Views Contracts gt All Open Contracts EE All Open Contracts All Open Contracts o Q Search All Expired Contracts Created in the last 7 New Contract Delete 1 30f3 25 per page gt Created in the last 30 o Contract Name Account Name Support Plan Support Type Status Q B Created in the last 3 S O amp Bolinger Contract Bolinger Platinum Hour Based Active Expired in the last 30 C Assent contract Assent Gold Incident Based Active Expiring in next 7 day em Expiring in next 30 da f O amp Acme contract Acme account Silver Fixed Active Expiring in next 3 mon Representation of Icons in the Contract List Vi
116. Sales details Accounts Contacts from CSV e Effective Search option through keywords and alphabets e Assigning Topic Template to Account e Set the number of accounts to be displayed per page e Perform operations such as creating new account editing deleting and converting into Accounts into Sub Account From the Accounts List View you can 1 Custom Views Customize the page to display the accounts using Custom Views option The accounts is sorted based on the filter criteria you specify while creating the custom view e fr create new custom filter e ZE view edit and delete the filters Accounts gt All Accounts All Accounts v Views Account Views All Accounts A B E Recently Added Account New Account Delete Topics gt Accounts Having Contra gt Accounts With SubAccou Account Name amp ES Acme Corporations 2 Import Sales Details from CSV Quick and easy to import all the sales details from other applications into SupportCenter Plus 3 Import Accounts Contact from CSV Import relevant data of account and contact information from the existing database as well as from other applications 4 Creating New Account Create New Accounts in the application 5 Bulk Operations 1 Deleting Accounts Delete bulk accounts from the list view Deleting accounts will automatically delete all the contacts associated to the account 2 Editing Accounts Perform bulk edit of the fiel
117. Save the changes Adding Tasks The Tasks associated to the account are listed under the Task block Click the Title link of the task to view the task details The page redirects to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations You also have an option to add new tasks from this page Refer Add New Task to know more Adding Events The Events associated to the account are listed under the Events block Click the Title link of the event to view the event details The page redirects to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations You also have an option to add new event from this page Refer Add New Event to know more ZOHO Corporation 185 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing and Deleting Account ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus provides you with the option to modify and delete the existing accounts provided you have the corresponding access permission The accounts for which requests have been raised cannot be deleted Editing Accounts 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Click the Edit icon beside the account to be edited The Edit Account page opens with the values populated while adding the account 3 Modify the details and Update the changes To perform a bulk edit of accounts 1 From the accounts list view page enable the check box beside the account to edit 2 Click Edit b
118. a definite active period or multiple contracts can be associated to a single product provided the time period does not overlap Apart from associating service contracts to products contracts can be associated to accounts alone Thus based on the associated contracts any request raised for the account product should be resolved based on the support plan and applied due by time Note 1 Contracts plays a vital role in setting the due by time for a request EN 2 Only one service contract can be associated to a account product for a given time period 3 The time period of two different contracts associated to a product account should not overlap Resolving requests based on Contracts Users raise requests into SupportCenter Plus and these requests are resolved based on contracts provided the user has an account in the SupportCenter Plus database If the user has an valid account then the contract associated to the product account is identified after which the due by time for the request is applied The work flow explains how contracts are involved for resolving requests i Identify Customer Is the customer and his e company available in the Identify active Contract Support Plan Contact database Yes p Finds the Support Step 2 Plan from the ses Ge gel ee Finding the Account product contract Contract gt SLA um y E Does the Support ntify ep gt Customer sends ide Product Finding the Account bas
119. abled So if you wish to change any of the settings then you need to stop mail fetching make the changes Save and then restart the mail fetching Outgoing Mail Settings 1 Click on the Outgoing tab 2 Specify the Server Name IP Address of the Outgoing Mail Server through which the mails are sent to the external world 3 Specify the backup server name which will take over the main server in case of server crash in Alternate Server Name IP Address field 4 Select the type of Email that needs to be fetched into the application from Email Type drop down Say SMTP SMTPS 5 The default Port for the email type is pre filled 6 If authentication is required for outgoing mails server enable Required Authentication and enter the specific credentials in User Name and Password fields 7 Click Save ZOHO Corporation 215 Server Name IP Address SMTP Alternate Server Name IP Address Email Type SMTP x Port 25 Enable TLS Transport Layer Security Save Mail Fetching status RUNNING Stop Fetching Last attempt to fetch mail Mails to be fetched Incoming R Outgoing Spam Filter Outgoing Mail Settings Mandatory Field Requires Authentication User Name Password Spam Filter You can mark all your junk mails into Spam by defining filter criteria for the mails Once you set a criteria say Subject contains Out of Office or Spam then mails matching this criteria wi
120. ails from the reconciled mail id the application shows or refers to the current available name and mail ID Click the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the Contact list view page Select the check box beside the contacts to be reconciled Click Reconcile Contacts button to open the Reconcile Contacts page All the selected contact is listed in the page Enable the radio button beside the primary contact 5 Click Reconcile All the contacts except for the selected primary contact is reconciled See ZOHO Corporation 208 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Associate Accounts with Contacts Bulk contacts can be associated to an account using this option To associate accounts with contacts Click the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contact list view page Enable the check box beside the contacts you wish to associated to the account Select the Account from the Select Account drop down EE SH ee Click Associate A success message appears on successfully associating the contacts with the account Contacts gt Recently Added Contacts Recently Added Contacts mn Ale el pl ele lel a New Contact Delete Reconcile Contacts l Name 3 Login Name Emai Acme corporations Acme Corporations Amsterdam Bill Thomas 3 secs Eneray Corporations E Bob Williams d as ZOHO Corporation 209 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Unapproved Contacts
121. aintenance Contract renewed Acme Co TI Service Contract renewed Acme Co TT Service Naukari O amp FacilitiesDesk Maintenance Contract Acme Co C Start Date a _Save _Cancel TI Service amp Sales Contract Naukari 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Click Save Only the selected columns are added in the contract list view ZOHO Corporation 157 Search Contracts You can also perform column wise search of contracts based on contract parameters like contract name account name support plan and so on To perform a column wise search 1 From the contract list view page click on Search icon a The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 2 Enter the search string in the column of your choice You can enter keywords in more than one column to perform a combined column search 3 Click Go The search results matching the search string s are displayed New Contract Delete i 1 11of11 i 25 per page ei F Contract Name Account Name Support Plan Support Type Status QE Maintenance Acme active Go i O E Service Contract Acme Corporations Platinum Hour Based Expired O amp Maintena
122. al Cost in is automatically populated on entering the above two fields Specify the Description about the time spent details in the given text box 10 Click Save OND ZOHO Corporation 92 Viewing Activities for the request The Activities tab appears if there are any tasks or events associated to the request Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry Activities History Tasks New Task Title Associated to Assigned To Due Date Status Priority Replace the battery Request Jake Thomas Nov 30 2010 06 00 PM Not Started High Events _New Event Title Associated to Created By Start Date End Date Location Team Meeting Request administrator Nov 11 2010 04 00 PM Nov 11 2010 07 00 PM Conference Hall You also have an option to add new tasks and events from this page To view the details of the tasks and events click on the Title link The page redirects to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations To know more on adding new tasks and events refer Add Tasks and Add Events Viewing Approvals for the request The Approvals tab appears if the request is submitted for approval to the manager All mails sent for approval is listed in descending order with details like Sent On Sent by and Status of approval Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry Activities Approvals History Send For Approval Show alll Hide All Sent On 29 Sep 2009 12 27 14 Status Pending Approval
123. alid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getAccount status Failure statuscode 5002 statusmessage The Account account name does not exists Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getAccount is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getAccount gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Account ID of the account to view gt lt input type hidden name account value Name of the account to view gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt Adding Contact URL Format The URL format for the Contact operation Add For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addContact For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json addContact ZOHO Corporation 326 Parameters ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide The parameters that needs to be passed via HTTP method for adding a new contact are as follows Parameter Value Description name string Name of the contact email string Email Address of the contact alternateEmail string Alt
124. alling a software can be classified under the category Software Installation sub category as Adobe and the Item as Photoshop Depending on the need you can create various such categories sub categories and item using this option These categories sub categories and items will be listed in the drop down menu in the New Request form 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page EA Mad 2 Click on HelpDesk Customizer icon Ze under HelpDesk Settings This opens the HelpDesk Category page where you can categorize the request in to category sub category and item Create New Category Click New Category button Specify the Category Name Say Transportation Problem This field is mandatory 3 Specify relevant information about the newly created category in the Description field 4 You can assign the category to a Support Rep so that all the issues related to this category will be automatically assigned to the selected support rep Select the support rep from Assign to Support Rep drop down 5 Click Save button to save the details You can see the category getting listed in the category list view below the form Create New Sub Category 1 Click New Sub Category button Or Click Add sub category icon beside the category title in the list view Specify a name for the Sub Category This field is mandatory Specify relevant information about the newly created sub category in the
125. ancel Editing Canned Response You can edit the canned response from the manage canned response list view page To edit a canned response 1 Click the Edit icon amp beside the Template name you wish to edit 2 From the Edit Canned Response form edit the details and Save the changes Deleting Canned Response You can delete the canned response from the manage canned response list view page To delete a canned response 1 Click the Delete icon LZ beside the Template Name you wish to delete A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 2 Click Ok to proceed The template is deleted from the available list ZOHO Corporation 104 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Replying via Canned Response You can reply to a request frequently raised using canned response by 10 11 12 From the request details page click Reply button to open the Reply To Contact pop up By default the Subject and the Description fields are pre populated with the specified values If the email address of the contact is specified in the application then the same is populated in the To field You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the mail address in CC field If you do not wish to disclose the recipient then specify the mail address in the BCC field Click Attach a file button to attach relevant files Select Canned Responses drop down to open the list of ava
126. anging title modifying the contents keywords and so on 6 Click Save To save the changes and approve the solution click Save and Approve 2 On editing an approved solution the solution should be sent for approval to the concern support rep i ZOHO Corporation 137 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Deleting Solutions You can delete individual solutions or delete a selected group of solutions from the list view page in SupportCenter Plus To delete a specific solution 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page Click on the Subject link of the solution you wish to delete From the Solution Details page select Delete button A dialog box pops up asking your confirmation on the delete process Click Ok to proceed The solution gets deleted from the list a ee To delete multiple solutions 1 From the Solution Details page select the solutions to be deleted from the list by enabling the check box Click the Delete button A dialog box pops up asking your confirmation on the delete process Click Ok to proceed The solutions gets deleted from the list Click Cancel to abort the deletion H a E So ZOHO Corporation 138 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Forward Solution Support reps can forward solutions for review to the concern support rep before it is submitting for approval To forward a solution
127. ar intervals without manually generating it 1 Click on the Reports tab in the header pane to open the All Reports page 2 Click New Scheduled Report button The Schedule Report page opens You have four option to schedule reports Generate Once You can generate the report only once by specify the Date using the calendar icon and Time from the hours and minutes drop down Daily Report Generate reports on a daily basis by specify the From Date and Time in hours and minutes from the drop down Weekly Report Generate weekly report by enabling the check box beside the days of the week on which you want to generate reports or you can select Everyday check box to generate reports on daily basis Also specify the Time in hours and minutes Monthly Report Generate reports on a monthly basis by enabling the check box beside the month on which the report has to be generated or by select Every Month check box to generate reports on monthly basis Also select the Date the report has to be generated every month and the Time in hours and minutes 3 Once you select the Schedule Type select the Report to schedule from Report drop down The report drop down lists all the available reports in the application This field is mandatory 4 Select the Format in which the report should be generated from the drop down Say PDF HTML CSV and so on 5 Specify the Email ID of the person to whom the generated report has to be sent in the T
128. associate them to accounts Say Dell Latitude D600 is a product representing Dell Laptops To access the product configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click on Product icon under the Account Settings block The product list view page opens From this page you can add edit and delete a product Add Product Click Add Product link In the Add Product form enter the Product Name This field is mandatory Choose the Product Type under which you would like to classify the product from the drop down Enter the Part No of the product 5 You also have an option to enter the Warranty Period of the product by choosing the number of years and months from the drop down Enter the purchased price of the product in Unit Price field 7 If you have added any Additional Product Details fields then the additional fields is displayed under Additional Product Details block If required add relevant Comments for the product 9 Click Save The product is added to the product list Edit Product Click the Edit icon beside Product Name you wish to modify the details In the Edit Product form you can edit all the fields mentioned in the add product procedure 3 Save the changes Delete Product A product can be deleted only if it is not being referenced elsewhere To delete a product 1 Click the Delete icon beside the Product Name A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click Ok to proce
129. at are to be held on that day e Upcoming Events Lists all the upcoming events in the organization e My Events Lists all the events created by the logged in support rep ZOHO Corporation 47 Customizing Activities List View You can customize the Activities List View to display columns of your choice To customize columns displayed in the list view 1 Click the Activities tab in the header pane 2 From the List View click on Column Chooser icon B The Columns widget pops up listing the parameters that can be displayed in the list view The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box Columns Edit Title Assigned to Created by EENEG Priority Q Fm administrator administrator Assigned to Medium administrator administrator Created by administrator administrator Start Date X administrator administrator Due Date administrator administrator Priority g administrator administrator z Save pech j administrator administrator 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Click Save Only the selected columns are added in the activities list view ZOHO Corporation 48 Searching Tasks and Events You can also perform a column
130. at regular intervals is listed in Backup Scheduling list view along with the Next Backup Scheduled time Deleting Backup Files 1 From the Backup Scheduling list view enable the check box beside the files you wish to delete 2 Click Delete button A confirmation dialog opens 3 Click Ok to continue The backup file is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 303 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide SupportCenter Plus API e Purpose of this Document e REST API e Supported Operations Purpose of this Document The purpose of this guide is to help developers understand the functionality of API in SupportCenter Plus It also lists the operations that can be performed the attributes and the input and output sample formats of each operation With this guide developers can successfully establish an integration between SupportCenter Plus and various other applications and web services REST API SupportCenter Plus API follows the REST pattern to integration and facilitate sharing of data with applications The REST API conforms to the REST operations of GET PUT and POST over HTTP POST or GET method The resultant output formats is either in json or xml The integration is established with the help of an API application which performs as a communicator between the two applications The API application is provided with certain roles and an API key for authentication mechanisms The operations to be
131. ate and time will be set with respect to the time zone Date Time Format Select the format of the date such as 2009 09 10 from the Set Date Format drop down box Similarly you can also set the time format from the Set Time Format drop down box The selected date and time format will be displayed where ever the date time is mentioned Say while creating a new request the request created on and due by time will be displayed in the selected date and time format The date and time is set accordingly to the selected time zone Email Signature You can personalize your signature while replying to mails on entering your signature in the text provided Click Save Change Password To change your password 1 Click on Change Password tab ot a Current Password New Password Confirm New Password Preferences Personalize Change Password Change Password Enter the Current Password in the field Next enter your New Password Re enter the new password in Confirm New Password field Click Save Your login password has been changed and will be taken into effect when u log out and log into the application ZOHO Corporation 42 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Feedback You can send a feedback regarding the product instantly to our support team To send a feedback 1 Click on Help link Select Feedback from the list of options v administrator Log out Online Hel
132. ated By Jake Thomas Last Updated By Jake Thomas Created On Oct 5 2009 04 42 PM Last Updated On Oct 8 2009 10 28 AM Views 8 View Type Public Status Approved Comment History Every action performed on the solution from the time of its creation can be viewed in the History tab The details displayed in the history tab are in the descending order with the latest performed action shown at the top and the earliest action at the bottom of the page f Comments History Approved by Jake Thomas Oct 8 2009 12 23 PM Approved solution is approved Collapse all Edited by Jake Thomas Oct 8 2009 12 22 PM Draft Created by administrator Oct 5 2009 04 35 PM Draft ZOHO Corporation 136 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing Solutions ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus provides you with the option to modify the existing solution provided you have the corresponding access permission The solutions once sent for approval cannot be edited or deleted by support reps without approval permissions Edit Solution To edit solution from the list view 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the solution to edit 3 From the Solution details page select the Edit button 4 The solution opens in an editable format with the values populated during creating the solution 5 Make the necessary changes by ch
133. ation out of which two are mandatory and enabled automatically e Alert CC Recipients on request Creation By default the CC recipients are notified via email when a request is created e Alert CC Recipients on Contact reply By default the CC recipients are notified via email when a contact replies to the request s e Alert CC Recipients on Support Rep reply Enable this option to alert the CC recipients via email when a support rep replies to the request ZOHO Corporation 79 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Alert CC Recipients when the request is Updated Enable this option to alert the CC recipients via email when the request is updated Alert CC Recipients when the request is Closed Enable this option to alert the CC recipients via email when the request is closed Cc Recipients Notifications Notify by Email s Alert Cc Recipients on request Creation Customize template A Alert Cc Recipients on Contact reply Customize template L Alert Cc Recipients on SupportRep reply Customize template WA Alert Cc Recipients when the request is Updated ai Alert Cc Recipients when the request is Closed Customize template ZOHO Corporation 80 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing Requests ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus provides you with the option to modify the created request either from the request list view page or from request details page
134. ator administrator administrator administrator administrator Log out Start Date Oct 27 2010 05 30 PM Oct 27 2010 05 30 PM Jan 28 2011 05 30 PM May 1 2011 05 30 PM Aug 2 2011 05 30 PM Nov 3 2011 05 30 PM Feb 1 2012 05 30 PM Apr 25 2012 05 30 PM Jul 24 2012 05 30 PM Oct 25 2012 05 30 PM 1 100f14 gt Dt Due Date Nov 27 2010 06 00 PM Nov 27 2010 10 00 AM Feb 25 2011 10 00 AM May 23 2011 10 00 AM Aug 24 2012 10 00 AM Nov 25 2012 10 00 AM Feb 23 2012 10 00 AM May 17 2012 10 00 AM Aug 18 2012 10 00 AM Nov 19 2012 10 00 AM 10 per page v Priority Im Medium High High High High High High High High High 1 Views The pre defined filters provide a quick consolidated view of the tasks and events configured in the application gt Ki Ki Ki gt Ki vi Views Tasks Tasks Today Pending Tasks Overdue Tasks Completed Tasks 4ll Tasks My Tasks Events All Events Events Today Upcoming Events My Events ZOHO Corporation 45 2 Set the number of requests per page and navigation buttons You can set the number of tasks and events to be displayed in the list view page 3 Recent Items All the recent items viewed by you is displayed under the Recent Items block You can also navigate back to the pages on clicking on the item link vi Recent Items S Sharon Harper d Acme Corporations Resolution for i
135. attery as a sub topic of the parent topic General then choose the parent topic as General and click Save Note Tou cannot move a topic as a subtopic to its current child topic DN Delete a Topic 1 In the Manage Topics page click on Delete link beside the topic to be deleted 2 If solutions are present under the topic the confirmation page consists of options to either move the solution to a different parent or move the sub topics to Topics Root ZOHO Corporation 144 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solutions gt Manage Topics gt Delete Topic Delete Topic Confirm Delete Topic Warrantly and Support Warrantly and Support contains 1 solutions and 3 sub topics A Deleting Topic Warrantly and Support will 1 Delete the 1 solutions present in it Choose a parent topic e Basketball related Gre a Golf related Queries s Replacement Queries e Support Queries Transportation Queries e Warrantly and Support e warranty 1 UU Choose a parent topic e Basketball related Queries A General SCH Golf related Queries H GE E D Transportation Queries Warrantly and Support e warranty 1 Additional Info Solutions present in the sub topics will not be deleted No I want to change the reference of the underlying solutions to a different parent topic 2 Move the 3 Sub Topics of Warrantly and Support to the Topics Root No I want to
136. based on filters 5 New Contract Create New Contract for an account product Refer Adding New Contract 6 Delete Bulk Delete of contracts Refer Deleting Contracts ZOHO Corporation 152 Contracts based on filters You can view contracts based on filters from the contract list view page In addition you can also create new filters using the Custom View option to place contracts in specific groups There are some pre defined filters in SupportCenter Plus as shown vw Views Contract Views gt gt 23 gt gt 23 23 23 23 23 23 Contracts gt All Active Contracts All Active Contracts All Active Contracts New Contract Delete All Expired Contracts Created in the last 7 O Contract Name Created in the last 30 ISS FacilitiesDesk Maintenance Contract Created in the last 3 IS Service amp Sales Contract C amp Contract for ZOHO niin Expired in the last 30 Expiring in next 7 day IS Maintenance Expiring in next 30 da IS Support Expiring in next 3 mon IS Contract for Acme All Active Contracts Lists all the contracts that are active and yet to get expired All Expired Contracts Lists all the contracts with expired active period Created in the last 7 days All the contracts created in the last 7 days is displayed Created in the last 30 days Lists of contracts created in the last 30 days Created in the last 3 months Lists all the contracts created
137. box beside the custom views to be deleted The administrator has the privilege to create and delete public views 2 Click Delete button A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The Custom View is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 71 Customizing Request List View ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to customize the request list view page by including columns of your choice To customize columns displayed in the list view 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on Column Chooser icon AR The available columns that can be displayed in the list view pops up The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box fo to Request ID ie ous Merge Assign to v ID select box Contact Name Assigne i sl Reply kup d George Mallroy Shawn Ad Nak otes kup d George Mallroy Shawn Ad Edit George Mallroy Heather G Subject Andrew Howard Contact Name Mack John Robg Assigned To Normal om Mark Anthon Jeniffer D ation Normal i Save Cancel ion Low Andrew Jeniffer D 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Cli
138. bular or Matrix you can perform actions such as Edit Save the report Schedule the report Mail the report and View the Report Query Unsaved Report Untitled Edit Save Report Show Query Mail this Report Cancel amp Print Preview Exportas HTML File A PDF file XLS file B CSV file My Org Inc Untitled Generated by administrator on 11 21 2009 10 26 Created Time From 10 01 2009 00 00 To 12 31 2009 23 59 Jake Thomas Not Assigned Shawn Adams administrator Count High i o 2 3 6 Normal 1 11 0 2 i4 Count 2 11 2 5 20 amp Print Preview Exportas HTML File DI PDF file xs file 2 csv file e Editing Reports Edit a custom report to choose fields of your choice e Save Reports Create and save your customized report e Schedule Reports Schedule to run the reports daily weekly or monthly using this option On scheduling the report the selected report gets generated automatically on the specified date and time and the generated report is sent to the respective person through e mail e Mail this report Mail the report instantly to support reps and account managers as a PDF HTML XLS or CSV format e Share You can share the reports to contacts in an accounts Editing Reports You can edit the report either from the reports list view or while viewing an individual report Reports List View 1 From the All Reports page click Edit lin
139. ccce cece eee e eee E a eae ne ee Ra 261 ele geen EE 264 SUPPOME Services EE 265 Configuring Support Plan 266 Configuring Service Level Agreement cccceee cece cette nets eee ea ete eenaeeaes 268 Configuring Operational Hour 271 Configuring Holiday 272 User and Related SettingS ccecceeee eee eee eee eter eee eee ee eeneeeeeeaees 273 Configuring ROleS 0 cece cece eee eee eee e A a Ae EA EA 274 Configuring Contact Additional Field cc ceece cece eee ee eee eee teen nee eaes 276 Configuring Support Rep Additional Fields ccccece cece eee cette neta ened 277 Configuring Support Rene 278 ACCOUNT MANAGED EE 282 Configuring GrOUPS s cceccecc ets cerris need deen on cite cei eaen ies Seve uae heen v aeons 283 Windows DOMAINS 240 ENK ANEN NENNEN EAR decid ANN a ds 285 Te e CR 287 Survey Setting Sissi iurare AE pei en NEEN hina Meds AE AAN AEE ee 288 Defining a 1 A rrtt rttr rtnn rnrn rnrn nnns rrene 289 Sending Gurvey cc eccc ccc e cence ee ee ene e eee ee eee ttnt tartan ttnn SEE SEE SSE ESSE ESSE ESE ESE EES 291 Survey Preview 293 Viewing Survey Results 294 Organization Settings EE 295 Configuring Organization Details 296 Configuring General Getting s 297 System Notification Settings cece cece eee eee teen t eee ne eae aes 302 Backup Scheduling 0 ennai 303 SUPPORTCENTER PLUS API ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna SOF API S
140. ce request maintenance request or a product consultation So while entering the Time Entry Details you need to enter the type of support provided by the support rep to the customer This can be configured as Time Entry Type 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Time Entry Type icon ES under the Helpdesk Settings block The list of available Time Entry Type is displayed From this page you can add edit and delete a time entry type Add Time Entry Type Click on Add New Time Entry Type link Specify relevant name as the Time Entry Type Name Say Product Consultation This field is mandatory 3 Specify the details about the time entry type in the Description field Save the changes Edit Time Entry Type 1 Click on the Edit icon beside the Time Entry Type Name you wish to edit 2 Modify the details and Save the changes Delete Time Entry Type 1 Click on the Delete icon LZ beside the Time Entry Type Name you wish to delete 2 A confirmation dialog appears Click Ok to proceed with the delete operation The Time Entry Type is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 247 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Time Entry Additional Fields If you require any further additional information while entering the time spent entry details apart from the pre set fields you can configure them under Time Entry Additional Fields You can ad
141. ceed The contact is removed from the list Recent Requests The Contact details page displays a quick view of all the recent requests raised by the contact You can also view all the requests raised by the contact by clicking View All Requests link Open Requests by Sharon Harper Showing Open Requests Showing 1 3 of 3 Show 3 per page Open Requests ID Subje Requests On Hold Assigned To Due By Status Date Pending Requests Passw Closed Requests John Roberts Oct 26 2009 12 21 PM Open Oct 26 2009 10 21 AM mail f John Roberts Oct 26 2009 12 20 PM Open Oct 26 2009 10 20 AM 1 replace battery request Shawn Adams Oct 26 2009 09 49 AM Open Oct 23 2009 05 49 PM Select the filter to view the requests to be displayed as shown in the image above If you are on a phone call with the contact then you can add a request instantly from the contact details page Click P Add Request link The details of the contact is automatically filled in the respective fields All you need to do is enter the Request Title and the Description of the request Add Request x Contact Name Sharon Harper Gerd Ge Delete Contact Email sharon acme com Phone 925 852 2564 Mobile 1234567890 Request Title com 2 Description Date Save Add more Details Oct 26 2009 10 21 AM Oct 26 2009 10 20 AM 1 replace battery request Shawn Adams Oct 26 2009 09 49 AM Open Oct 23
142. ch field Reminders Preferences Feedback Online Status OS Ore DM Dei Log a Call Log a Call is an instant mode to create new requests or view existing requests when you are on a call with the customer With log a call option support reps can log requests either by conducting a search from the existing customers list or by entering the contact details for a first time caller Click here to know more Add New drop down The Add New is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Requests New Reminders New Task New Canned response New Solution New Contract New Account and Contact Add New 2 Q Log a Call Request Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact 5 e nes 4 E VW d 8 ZOHO Corporation 23 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Search field You can search for Requests Accounts Contacts Solutions and System Log from the home page If you wish to search for Zoho Corporations then select Accounts from the drop down and enter the keyword as Zoho Corporations Click Go to redirect the page to the Accounts list view page Reminders Reminders is a substitute for those sticky notes or post it notes which you use to remember your tasks for the day Click here to know more Contacts Admin Reports Dashboards a Attend the demo on Sep 24 2010 11 00 AM a O Call Thomas to Sep 27 2010 03 00 PM
143. change the reference of the underlying sub topics to a different parent topic Selecting on the check box brings the Choose a parent topic list box from where you can move the solution to a different topic or move sub topic to a different parent topic accordingly Click Confirm The topic is deleted from the available list Note ou cannot move a subtopic of the topic that is going to be deleted ZOHO Corporation 145 Browsing Solutions by Topic You can view the list of solutions for a topic using this option To browse solutions under individual topics 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solutions list view page 2 Click on Browse by Topics drop down The Topics window drops down listing all the available topics and their sub topics 3 To view all the sub topics click gt gt Show All link This lists out the topics and sub topics in logical manner as shown below Topic N Support General General Warrantl warranty warranty al Manage Topics Topics Template Browse by Topic v Basketball related Queries General Golf related Queries Replacement Queries Support Queries Transportation Queries Warrantly and Support e warranty 1 e warranty 2 4 On clicking the topic the solutions of the topics and its corresponding sub topics gets listed 5 Click the sub topic to view the solutions only in the sub topic ZOHO Corporation 146
144. cified only if the reminder is added from the request module 1 Click on Reminders link 2 From My Reminders pop up select gt Show All link By default you can view All the reminders from this page 3 If you wish to view all the open reminders alone then select Open option from Showing drop down box Home gt Showing All Reminder Showing DI v 1 30f3 10 per page i New Reminder Delete Change Reminder State To Select v Change C Reminder Summary Reminder Date Module Link Q C Call Andrew to inquire on the webinar Sep 10 2009 03 00 PM General C Attend the demo on softcel Sep 11 2009 01 00 PM General C RequestID 11 Subject daily check on server Business Unit General Contact preethi Sep 14 2009 11 00 AM Request Request Id 11 From this page you can Add New Reminder Delete bulk reminders and Change the status of a reminder If a reminder is added from the request module then a link to the request with its request Id is provided from this page You can show your reminders to Contacts on enabling the option under Setting in the Admin module ZOHO Corporation 38 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Change the Reminder status Once you have completed the task you can change the reminder state to complete 1 Click on Reminders link to open My Reminders pop up 2 Select the radio button beside the completed task The strike off task will be a
145. ck Save Only the selected columns are added in the request list view ZOHO Corporation 72 Search Requests You can search for requests based on the keywords request ID and column wise search on entering the request details such as subject requesters name and so on from the request list view Search Requests based on e Keywords e Request ID e Column wise Search Requests based on Keywords Request tab To do a keyword search for requests 1 Click Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Enter the keyword in the search field 3 Click Search All requests that match the keyword provided by you in the search field is displayed Reguests gt All Requests All Requests EI Go to Request ID gt Close Merge Assign to 7 2 New Request Delete F Subject Contact Name Assigned To E E Request for replacement of bat Satmary administrator oO Es Battery replacement request peter administrator Performing a Global Search You can also perform a Global Search that searches the keyword in every module at one go Advance search options such as Wildcard search phrase search boolean search field specific search and much more can be used to make the search effective To know more click Search Tips ZOHO Corporation ip E Requests Accounts Contacts Solutions SKS SS KS Contracts ZOHO Corporation 73 Search requests ba
146. ck the Title link of the event to be viewed Event Details The Event details block displays the Title of the event privacy settings name of the user who has created the event along with the created date and time This is followed by the remaining details that was filled while creating the event such as the Start Date and End Date of the event Location Description and the request contract account or contact to which the event is associated to Activities gt AllEvents gt View Event View Event Edit Delete Ms Team Meeting Private event Created By administrator Created on Nov 9 2010 12 46 PM Event Details Your Response Title Team Meeting Will you attend Yes ONo Q Maybe Associated to Account Acme Start Date Nov 1 2010 04 00 PM Post comment End Date Nov 1 2010 07 00 PM Location conference hall Description Team Meeting Add Reminder 2 hours before the event starts Edit Reminder If you wish to be reminded of this event then you can set a personalized reminder using the Add Reminder link Select the number of days hours before which the reminder should be sent using Remind me before drop down You can choose to be prompted by Email or SMS or both Click d to set the reminder If you have specified a reminder while creating the event then the same is displayed in the event details block You can modify the number of days hours before which the reminder should be sent using the Ed
147. con under Organizational Settings 3 In the System Notification Settings page specify the name to be sent along with the notification in Sender Name filed 4 Specify the Reply To mail address Notifications To enable notification to support reps when an application error occurs or when there is a failure in backup process 1 Enable the check box beside Send e mail when an Application Error Occurs 2 Select the support reps to be notified by clicking Choose button 3 The Select Support Rep window pops up displaying the list of all the global support reps You can select more than a single support rep and click Ok The selected support reps are displayed in the non editable text field Apart from this you can also customize the email template of the notification Password Reset Request Notification To do this click the Customize Template link The screen refreshes with the Message Template settings from where you can edit the notification subject and message by adding or deleting variables to either of the block and click Save To add or delete variables to subject and message of the email template just click the corresponding variable in the list box on the right Junk Notification Filter Junk Notification Filters prevents unwanted acknowledgements notifications or information mails being sent to support reps that are not requested and do not require any action to be taken These unwanted mails might create unnecessary emai
148. count Managers icon 3 under the User and Related Settings block The Account Manager list view page opens From this page you can add edit and delete an account manager Add Account Manager Click on the Add New Account Manager link Enter the Personal Details of the Account Manager such as Name and the Employee ID The Name is mandatory field 3 Specify the Contact I nformation of the account manager such as E mail Phone and Mobile details in the respective fields 4 Specify the Login Details of the account manager such as Login Name Password and Re type Password details 5 Click Save to save the details Edit Account Manager 1 Click the Edit icon beside the account manager name to be edited 2 Modify the details and Save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Account Manager 1 Click the Delete icon beside the account manager name to be deleted This opens confirmation dialog box 2 Click OK to proceed with the delete operation If you do not want to delete the account manager click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 282 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Groups Groups denotes the classification of your support team so that all the incoming requests can be categorized and equally distributed amongst the support reps Say the support reps under the Warranty Group handle requests relating to warranty
149. ctive Directory link The Import from Active Directory page pops up as shown below Import from Active Directory Import from Active Directory Please Note On Importing Existing data will be overwritten and New data will be added Mandatory Field Domain Name ACME Add New Domain Domain Controller acme Login Name administrator Password DEET Select Fields for Import Phone Mobile Job title E mail Next Cancel All the fields are mandatory and should be configured 2 Select the Domain Name and Domain Controller from which the support rep needs to be imported 3 Specify the Login Name and Password to the domain 4 Select the fields to be imported from the active directory The unselected fields will not be imported 5 Click Next The import wizard page opens which displays the various Organizational Units OUs available in the domain 6 Select the specific OU to import users by enabling the check box 7 Click Start I mporting button to import the users After importing the users you get a report on successful and failed import 8 Click Close Window On importing users from Active Directory the Login permissions either AD authentication or Local authentication should be provided from the List View ZOHO Corporation 279 Enabling AD Login 1 From the support rep list view select the check box beside the name of the support rep 2 Click Enable AD Login button The AD Login permission is enab
150. cts gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt ZOHO Corporation 332 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solution Related Operations While invoking the solutions related operations through API the operation defined are based on the parameter value and the developer needs to submit a request to the url via HTTP POST or GET method NOTE Before proceeding with the solution related operations and its corresponding parameters please note that the parameters are case sensitive and should be used as defined The operations that can be performed over solutions is e View Read Solutions View Read Solutions The solutions can be viewed based on the Solution Id or by conducting a search using keywords URL Format The URL format for the Solution operation View Read For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getSolution For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getSolution Parameters Either of the following parameters should be passed via HTTP method Parameter Value Description Id string Solution ID of the solutions to be viewed search string View solutions based on search keywords Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters s response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET metho
151. d ZOHO Corporation 333 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml getSolution status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getSolution status Failure statuscode 4000 statusmessage The parameter apikey is not available in the request Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getSolution is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getSolution gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Your solution ID gt lt input type hidden name search value Your solution search keyword gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt
152. d Search Strings e Column wise search Search solutions based on Keywords and Search String Solutions tab 1 Click Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 Enter the keyword in the search field provided 3 Click Search All solutions that match the keyword provided by you in the search field is displayed Q admin password i Search New Solution Delete Approve Actions Performing a Global Search You can also perform a Global Search that searches the keyword in every module at one go Advance search options such as Wildcard search phrase search boolean search field specific search and much more can be used to make the search effective To know more click Search Tips y zono Corporation All Requests Accounts Contacts Solutions ER ew Ri Contracts ZOHO Corporation 131 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Column wise search of solutions You can also perform column wise search of solutions if you know any of the solution detail such as subject topic name and so on To perform a column wise search 1 From the solution list view page click on Search icon The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 2 Enter the search string in the column of your choice You can enter keywords in more than one column to perform a combined column search 3 Click Go The search results matching the
153. d of the notification The mail contains the link to the specific solution which needs approval On clicking the link it leads you to the login screen where on providing proper credentials the solution awaiting approval opens To approve reject solutions refer Approve Reject Solutions ZOHO Corporation 141 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Approve Reject Solution Once the solution is submitted for approval to the concern support rep a mail notification is sent to the support rep requesting the approval of the solution along with the solution link On clicking the solution link and logging into the application with proper credentials the support rep can either approve or reject the solution Refer Configuring Roles for solutions approval permission 1 Click on the solution link to approve the solution 2 Login to the SupportCenter Plus application using your user name and password 3 The view solution details page of the solution pending for approval opens The status of the solution shows as Approval Pending 4 Select Approve Actions drop down gt Approve Solution option 1 The Approve Comments pops up 2 Specify any related Comments in the field provided 3 Click Approve 5 If you wish to reject the solution select Reject Solution under Approve Actions 1 The Reject Comments pops up 2 Specify comments such as reason to reject the solution in the Comments field 3 Click Reject
154. d or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml addRequestNote status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation addRequestNote is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addRequestNote gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Request ID of the request to add note gt lt input type hidden name comment value Note added to the request gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt View Read Notes for a request This operation displays the notes added to a request by specifying the Request ID ZOHO Corporation 316 ManageEngine Support Center Plus URL Format The URL format for the Request operation View Read Notes for a request For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getRequestNotes For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getRequestNotes Parameters The parameter to be passed via HTTP method is given below Administrator Guide Parameter Value Description id string Request ID of the req
155. d text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Type Entry Additional Fields icon Ed under Helpdesk Settings block The Type Entry Additional Fields page opens where you can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the time spent entry details form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields 1 Click on the Date Time tab Specify the Label for the additional field 3 Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the setting N ZOHO Corporation 248 Remote
156. d up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the add new support rep form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields 1 Click on the Date Time tab 2 Specify the Label for the additional field 3 Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings These additional fields will appear while adding a support rep under Additional Support Rep Details block To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save The fields deleted is removed from the Add Support Rep form ZOHO Corporation 277
157. ddress If you wish to send the same information to more than one person enter the email Ids of those people in the CC field separated by comma If you do not wish to disclose the recipients of the information enter the email ids of those people in BCC field separated by comma The announcement is sent as email to the concern people and the announcement is added as Public in the home page 7 Click Save The announcement is added and a pop up window appears displaying the announcement details From this window you can Edit Delete and navigate Previous and Next to other announcements Using this navigation options you can view the announcements without closing the pop up window Manage Announcements To view all the announcements added in the application 1 From the announcement block in the home page click on Show All button The Manage Announcements page opens as show Home gt Manage Announcements Manage Announcements Filter Showing Showing 1 8 of 8 Show s M per page New Announce Te be shown Title Already Shown Shown To Date From Date To A A webinar to be conducted for eServer Chennai t Everyone Sep 14 2009 03 20 PM View forever Acme helpdesk upgrade t Everyone Sep 14 2009 03 00 PM Sep 15 2009 03 00 PM A Nortel network will be down due to maintenance fro E Everyone Sep 14 2009 02 53 PM Sep 24 2009 02 54 PM L A webinar to be conducted for eServer Chennai Support RepSep 14 2009 1
158. ds such as Industry Account Manager and Time Zone from the accounts list view 3 Assigning Topic Templates to accounts Assign solutions on particular topics to accounts through Topic Template ZOHO Corporation 167 4 Convert Account into Sub Account Convert existing Accounts into a Sub Accounts from the list view 1 Select the check box beside the accounts to convert as sub account from the list view 2 Select the Account to which the sub accounts should be added from the drop down beside Convert as Sub Account button 3 Click Convert as Sub Account button A confirmation dialog appears Click Ok to proceed The selected accounts are converted as Sub Accounts In the image below Acme Corp and Acme Inc are selected as the Sub Account for the Account Acme Q search EE aiis clio eE F el I I K L M N New Account Delete Edit Topics Template Fi Account Name 4 Phone anager go E Acme 987 849 4732 info acme com Matt Brady E Acme Corp 987 849 4732 info acmecorp com Matt Brady E Acme Inc 987 849 4628 info acme com Matt Brady In addition you can add new Sub Accounts to accounts and also convert accounts into sub accounts from the accounts details page Refer Sub Accounts to know more 6 Search Conduct a search for accounts either through keywords alphabets or column wise search option Accounts gt All Accounts All Accounts Q ZOHO Corporation i Search
159. e This template can also be used for other accounts however multiple templates cannot be assigned to an account To create topics template refer Topics Template under Solutions module 1 Topics Template can be shared by other accounts 2 A single account can be assigned to one topics template 3 When users without accounts log into SupportCenter Plus you can configure the corresponding solution views under Admin gt Settings gt Solution View Assigning Topic Template 1 Click the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the Accounts list view page 2 Enable the check box beside the account you want to assign topics template and click Topics Template drop down Accounts gt Recently Added Accounts Recently Added Accounts All A D E B C New Account Delete PE Assign Template ES Acme Unassign ee ES Tricell Inc Mark Richard ES ARCAM Corporation Mark Richard ES Energy Corporations Andrea Whitman RW O O O RW ES ZOHO Corporations Alan Smith 3 Select the Assign Template option from the list The Assign Template page opens as shown below ZOHO Corporation 187 Assign Template Topics Template Select a Template Select a Template General Replacement amp Support 4 Select a Topic Template from the drop down list 5 Click Assign button Note On assigning the Topics Template to an account the solutions related to the topics template can be viewed by the c
160. e contact On successful connection a pop up indicating the Call has dialed successfully appears Screen Pops When a customer contacts the support team via phone a screen pop displaying the customer details such as name account information and contact number appears ZOHO Corporation 222 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Requests gt AN Requests Refresh this page Every 3 All Requests Go to New Request edit Delete Close merge Assign to x Rows per Gage 10 zl 1 90 Subject Contact Name Email Account Status Date Last Update Ir E My Laptop ts not working Paul Graham paul graham energy com Energy Corporation Open Jun 2 2009 05 20 AM Jun 2 2009 G7 My 1 Phone Display has gone Michella John michella acme com ACME Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 25 AM Jun 2 2009 IR amp Printer maintanance Request Anna patrick anna patrick arcam com ARCAM corporation Open Jun 2 2009 05 28 AM Jun 2 2009 D Replace Battery Request Peter Anderson peter anderson acme com ACME Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 29 AM Jun 2 2009 IZ Computer servicing Richard watson richard watson tricell com Tricell Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 31 AM Jun 2 2009 cr servicing Request Escalation Richard watson richard watson tricell com Tricell Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 45 AM Jun 2 2009 r g Replace Battery Request Peter Anderson peter anderson acme com ACME Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 48 AM Jun 2 2009 cr E Printer maintanance Request Anna patrick anna
161. e Custom Views To delete custom views 1 Select the check box beside the custom views to be deleted The administrator has the privilege to create and delete public views 2 Click Delete button A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The Custom View is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 173 Customizing Accounts List View ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to customize the accounts list view page by including columns of your choice To customize the accounts list view 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Click on Column Chooser icon AR The available columns that can be displayed in the list view pops up The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box A Import Sales details from CSV Import Accounts Contacts from CSV Columns K E M N o P Q R select box zl Convert as Sub Account Rows peri T edit a Topics Template Time Zone Account Name Qo All topics GMT London Account Manager Internet General GMT 01 00 Topics Template Replacement and Suppor GMT 01 00 Time Zone ies Replacement and Suppor GMT 01 00 Industry Internet All topics GMT 01 00 CT Email Internet v Replacement and Suppor GMT 01 00 General GMT 06 00 Save Cancel Internet 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save 4
162. e Enable TLS 8 You can Suppress Auto Notification and prevent Email Storming from contacts by halting the mail looping and mail fetching into the application Specify the number of mails and the time span after which the mail fetching and the looping should be stopped 9 Click Save The configurations will be saved and SupportCenter Plus will try to establish connection with the mail server Click Start Fetching button to start the mail fetching ZOHO Corporation 214 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Mail Fetching status STOPPED Start Fetching Last attempt to fetch mail Mails to be fetched Incoming Outgoing Spam Filter G During mail fetching ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus will delete e mail messages for the mail account in the mail server Hence please create a separate mail account and alias it to this mail id Server Name IP Address pop acme com User Name administrator Password enges Email Type POP Port 110 Fetch mails every D Minutes Enable TLS Transport Layer Security v Mail Loop amp Mail Storm Prevention Settings kel Suppress auto notification To prevent mail loops When a contact sends 3 emails within a span of pi minutes kl Stop email fetching To overcome mail storms DoS attacks When a contact sende 13 emails within a span of a H minutes Save Once the mail fetching starts the Save button is dis
163. e Subject link of the solution to be viewed The View Solution Details page opens to view the Solution content Solution Details and the Comments History block Solution Content Solution content block displays the Solution ID status of the solution subject description and the category to which the solution belongs This block also contains the Search field to search for requests using specific keywords mentioned while adding a solution In addition you are also provided with options to perform various operations on a solution such as delete edit and approve reject solutions from the Actions drop down Solutions gt View Solution Details Q Search Browse by Topics v Edit Delete Forward Approve Actions v Notifications not generated Lettre 303 Category Support Queries Status Approved While viewing solutions you can identify if the solution is private or public E Private solutions that can be viewed only by the support reps T Public solutions viewed by both the support reps and contacts Solution Details The solution details block displays the name of the support rep who added the solution the created time and date number of views for the solution status of the solution lasted updated time and date and the view type In addition you can also view the details of the support rep who added and updated the solution by clicking on their name ZOHO Corporation 135 Solution Details Cre
164. e Topics Template Alternatively from the accounts list view page you can search for accounts in alphabetic order using the alphabets displayed Performing a Global Search You can also perform a Global Search that searches the keyword in every module at one go Advance search options such as Wildcard search phrase search boolean search field specific search and much more can be used to make the search effective To know more click Search Tips ZOHO Corporation e gt Requests Accounts Contacts Solutions Contracts 9 9 a a a E ZOHO Corporation 175 Column wise Search You can also perform column wise search of accounts if you know any of the account detail such as account name account manager topics template and so on To perform a column wise search 1 From the accounts list view page click on Search icon The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 2 Enter the search string in the column of your choice You can enter keywords in more than one column to perform a combined column search 3 Click Go The search results matching the search string s are displayed ZOHO Corporation 176 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding a New Account Accounts in SupportCenter Plus can be considered as organizations and firms All the account details such as annual revenue address phone email id and accoun
165. e and Description f you require additional details to be entered such as category priority or assign a support rep click Add More Details link This takes you to the New Request form ZOHO Corporation 30 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Note If you have selected the Add Request link under Search results for Accounts EN the contact name and contact details fields are not pre filled and should be manually entered by the support rep Apart from raising a request for a customer on call certain contacts call to the support team to inquire updated on their ticket With View Request link you can check all the requests raised by the Contact or for the Account The requests can be viewed based on filters so you will be aware of all the open and pending requests Log a call for new users If the contact is a first time caller you can enter the contact name contact details and the request details using Log a call for new users option The contact name contact details and the account mentioned in form are automatically updated in the Contacts and Accounts tab If you require additional details to be entered such as category priority or assign a Support rep click Add More Details link This takes you to the New Request form Click Save to save the request ZOHO Corporation 31 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide My Tasks You can track tasks assigned to you from My Task bl
166. e changes Edit Item 1 Click the Title of the sub category to open the item details page 2 Click the Title icon This opens the edit item form 3 Modify the details and Save the changes Delete Category 1 Select the categories to be deleted by enabling the check box 2 Click the Delete button A pop up confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click OK to proceed You can see the category deleted from the list Delete Sub Category Click on the category for which the sub category needs to be deleted Enable the check box beside the sub category to delete Click Delete button A pop up confirming the delete operation appears 7 Er er E Click OK to proceed You can see the sub category deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 227 Delete Item 1 2 3 4 5 Click on the category of the Item to be deleted Click the Sub Category Enable the check box beside the items to delete Click Delete button A pop up confirming the delete operation appears Click OK to proceed You can see the item deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 228 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Status Requests fetched into SupportCenter Plus application will be in various stages of completion by the support rep For easy management and to know the status of the request you can create various request status under which the requests can be grouped These status can either be In Progres
167. e format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml getProduct status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 331 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getProduct status Failure statuscode 5002 statusmessage The Account account name does not exist Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getProduct is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getProduct gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name account value Name of the account to view the produ
168. e sent to the SupportCenter Plus Support Team and they will get in touch with you Do not forget to provide your e mail ID or your contact information for the team to get in touch with you ZOHO Corporation 360
169. e that the notification will be sent This setting is just to choose the support reps to q whom the notification needs to be sent and the time frame after which the en unpicked request notification is to be sent To actually send the notification you need to enable the corresponding setting under the Notification Rules under the Admin tasks 1 Notify group support rep by mail when request is added to group 2 Notify support rep by mail when request is unpicked in group 8 Click Choose button to open the complete list of support reps available in your help desk 9 Select the support reps from the list box and click OK 10 Select the Time period from the creation of the request in group after which the notification of unpicked requests will be sent to the selected support reps 11 If you wish to describe the group in detail enter the same in the Description text box 12 Click Save ZOHO Corporation 283 Edit Group 1 Click the Edit icon beside the group name you wish to edit 2 In the Edit Group form you can modify the name of the group the support reps belonging to the groups the notification settings and description 3 Click Save to save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Group 1 Click the Delete icon beside the group name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion If you do
170. e the other requests become the child Request ID 7 8 ZOHO Corporation 84 Merge Request from Details Page To perform merge operation from the request details page 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject of the request to be merged This request is the parent request 3 From the request details page click the Actions drop down menu gt select Merge Request option Merge this Request page opens Merge this Request Search for Request Search Show All Requests sc All Requests Showing 1 25 of 43 D L DL Show 25 per page ID Subject Contact Assigned To D 56 Cannot restore the backup data Sharon Harper Jake Thomas Oo 54 Replace battery request Sharon Harper Jake Thomas D 53 Replace battery request Sharon Harper Jake Thomas D 51 Replace battery request Sharon Harper Jake Thomas D 40 problem with the software Radhike Jake Thomes D 49 Cannot restore the backup data Sharon Harper Ruth Hinks D 42 problem with the software Radhika George Mallory D 43 AC not working properly Radhika administrator D 46 system crashed Sharon Harper administrator Oo 48 Very importand and critical Mark Adams Unassigned ro ap A ALL AL eg ees Choose a request to merge Cancel 4 You can search for specific request by providing a search string in Search for Request field 5 You can also select request based on filters from the Show combo box To confir
171. ect the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields Click on the Date Time tab You can configure 4 additional fields for sales Specify the Label for the additional field This is a mandatory field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings The configured additional fields appears in the Account module while importing the sales details from CSV and while associating products to an account from the account details page To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save ZOHO Corporation 258 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Schedule CSV Import The easy to use CSV import option quickly imports all the relevant information from the existing database and also provides an option to k
172. ed Requests Apart from creating templates for the frequently raised requests there are certain maintenance activities need to be executed at regular intervals say like cleaning up the database once a month or server maintenance once in 3 months and so on For all these repetitive tasks you can schedule requests as preventive maintenance or for regular maintenance of a task Once a request is scheduled new request will be created and assigned to the specified support rep name automatically at the scheduled interval To schedule requests 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Ley 2 Click on Scheduled Requests icon under the Helpdesk Settings block The list of Scheduled Requests is displayed 3 Click on Schedule a new request link For Scheduling a request you need to Create a Request Template and then Schedule the Template to specific intervals Creating Request Template Create a request template for the activity that needs to be scheduled at regular intervals The Request Template form is that of the default template configured in Admin gt Request Template 1 Specify the Request details such as Status Level Mode and Priority from the drop down 2 Next Select the Group Details such as Group and the Support Reps associated to the selected group 3 Specify the Contact Name using the search icon amp You can also add a new contact if the contact details are not
173. ed contract Plan have associated Request Does the Customer Request p SLAs pertain to any product Yes Y No p Uses the Default Support Plan Identify the Customer Product On receiving request from a customer in the application e A search is conducted for the customer and his company in the available list of contacts in the database i e if the customer has an existing Account in the database and e If the customer s request pertains to any Product that is associated to the account ZOHO Corporation 149 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide If the customer and his company details are not available in the list of contacts in SupportCenter Plus database then the Default Support Plan is applied for that request Identify the Active Contract Identify the associated contracts and analyze if the product account has an active contract e Ifthe customer s account is available in the database and if the request pertains to a product then the contract associated for the product is identified e Ifthe customer s account is available in the database and the request does not pertain to any product then the contract associated for the account is identified Service Level Agreement and Support Plan The support services offered for an account product is listed in the corresponding contract details Based on the products account the Support Plan has associated Service Level Agreement with certain
174. ed through API can be made to access only by certain Business Units From the Available Business Units block select the Business Unit for which API operations can be performed using the gt gt button 3 Click Save A success message is displayed along with the API Key Click lt lt Previous button to go back to Step 1 Click Cancel to return to the API list view ZOHO Corporation 305 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Generating the API Key Once the API Application is defined and saved the API Key id displayed along with an Email ID text field to send the API Key to the concern developer Apart from this you can e mail the API Key from the list view using Email API Key link SUCCESS API Application defined successfully Application API Application API Key 872185D0 82F0 4082 9364 A43DD0E1DSE1 EmailID jake acme com Send API Key Close Specify the Email ID in the text field as shown above Click Send API Key button The API Key is sent as an e mail to the specified email address Click Close if you do not want to send the API Key Editing an API Application To edit an API Application from the list view 1 Click More Actions drop down beside the API application to edit 2 Select Edit API Application option Define Application form appears 3 Modify the Name and Description in the form Click Next gt gt button to display the Application Permission form 4 Enab
175. ed with the deletion The product is deleted from the list If you do not wish to delete the product click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 256 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Additional Fields If you require any further additional information you can define your own additional fields that needs to appear while adding a new account apart from the pre set fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click the Account Additional Fields icon under the Account Settings block The Account Additional Fields page opens You can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the new accounts form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fie
176. edirects to the activities list view page This page consists of two sub tabs Tasks sub tab and Events sub tab Clicking on Tasks sub tab lists the tasks list view page while clicking on Events sub tab lists the events list view page ManageEngine SupportCenter P JUGE Activities Views Tasks Tasks Today Pending Tasks Overdue Tasks Completed Tasks All Tasks My Tasks Events All Events Events Today Upcoming Events My Events Recent Items D I Conference Meeting D I Replace lost warrant Requests Lo Solutions ontracts Tasks Events Tasks Today New Task Delete Title Contacts Associated to CO E Assian Loins to contacts O E Change the printer Toner O amp Channe the printer Toner E Change the printer Toner C Change the printer Toner CO E Change the printer Toner O amp Change the printer Toner O E Chanae the orinter Toner O amp Change the orinter Toner O E Change the printer Toner Request Request Request Request Request Request Request Request Request From the List View page you can Admin Reports Assigned to administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator Dashboards Created by administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administr
177. eep the database in sync with the organization s customer database By scheduling the CSV Import you can automate the process of importing accounts and contact information from an external database using the CSV files Four step process of automating CSV import e When the CSV Schedule is configured and enabled SupportCenter looks for CSV file under the lt SupportCenter_Home gt csv_files directory on a periodic basis e When it finds a CSV file the file is processed and moved the file to lt SupportCenter_Home gt csv_files ProcessedDir e To automate this process it is advised to write a script that would send the changed information of the external database as a CSV file to the lt SupportCenter_Home gt csv_files directory e Refresh the SupportCenter Plus Web Client to proceed further To schedule CSV Import 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click the Automate CSV Import icon BO under the Helpdesk block The Schedule CSV Import list page opens 3 Click Add Schedule link The Add Schedule page opens Si Note CSV file should be available under SupportCenter Plus CSV directory to automate the import Path for the directory would be AdventNet ME SupportCenter csv_fiels If no CSV file is found in the directory then you get a message as shown below To place replace or update the file automatically in the CSV directory it is advised to write a script to send the information from the external database
178. en i d o Notification r General Mar 31 2010 03 13 PM administrator sw upgrade Representation of icons in the list view e solutions is approved by the concern support rep solutions that are submitted for approval to the concern support rep solutions that are not submitted for approval solutions that are rejected by the concern support rep DI file is attached to the solution e no file is attached to the solution e 4 column wise search option to search for solutions based on subject topic name and so on R select the columns to be displayed in the list view From the solutions list view page you can 1 Manage Topics Organize your solutions in a logical manner by grouping them under specific topics and sub topics You can add rename and move topics and sub topics to different parent topics Refer Managing Topics ZOHO Corporation 123 Solutions gt Manage Topics lt lt Back Manage Topics Available Topics Add New Topic Topic name Solutions Actions Basketball related Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete s General 2 Rename Change Parent Delete Golf related Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete Replacement Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Support Queries 2 Rename Change Parent Delete e Transportation Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Warranty Queries 0 Rename Change Parent Delete e Water sport related Queries 0 Rename Change Parent
179. en Open Open Open Open Open Sep 29 2009 12 55 PM Sep 29 2009 12 18 PM Sep 28 2009 05 32 PM Sep 28 2009 04 35 PM Sep 28 2009 03 26 PM Sep 28 2009 03 26 PM Sep 25 2009 11 16 AM Sep 25 2009 11 19 AM Sep 25 2009 10 32 AM From this page you can view the requests list based on filters and also view the details of a request by clicking on the Subject link ZOHO Corporation 112 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Replying to the Contact Sending a response to the contact is required when a new request is received Also when a support rep is ready to close a request the same can be notified to the contact so that if the contact has any concerns about the same he she can raise the issue The support rep can then address the issue and close the request after the contact is completely satisfied To respond to the contact 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be replied 3 From the request details page select Reply drop down menu gt Reply option The Mail to Contact form pops up Alternatively you can click the Reply link below the Description from the request details page 4 The From address is pre populated with the Reply To mail address configured under Mail Configurations under Admin module 5 If the email address of the contact is specified in the application then the same is populated in the
180. en text field Alias URL To provide an alternate URL 1 In the text field provided beside the http text enter the URL along with the port number if needed 2 Click the Open alias URL in a new window link just below the text field to test if the alias URL works Configure URL Redirection on Logout You can provide URL redirection when the support rep and contact logout of SupportCenter Plus application Specify the URL redirection beside the fields Redirect Support Representatives upon logout to this URL and Redirect Contacts upon logout to this URL To redirect the customers to the customer portal type the URL provided below in the address bar of the browser http lt server name gt lt port number gt portal OR http lt server name gt lt port number gt sd SolutionsHome sd Click Save to save the changes made in the settings ZOHO Corporation 301 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide System Notification Settings In case of any application error such as mail fetching problem or if there is a failure in the backup process you have an option to alert the concern support reps immediately using System Notification Settings Furthermore you can prevent unwanted acknowledgements or notifications being sent to the support reps through J unk Notification Filter 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on System Notification Settings i
181. ent to the contact once the request is in the resolved state e The contact can close the request using the link provided via email He can also re open the request by replying to the mail or clicking the Re open Request button A more simpler method to close or re open the request is by logging into the application e Ifthe contact takes neither of the actions then the request gets closed after the specified number of days from the combo box 4 Save the details Note Please note that the check box If the contact takes no action within the FiF specified number of days can be selected only on enabling Allow contacts to Close Re open the Resolved requests check box ZOHO Corporation 235 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Template Request Templates are created for the most frequently raised requests so that the request can be accessed and raised instantly The template is configurable to suit individual request which may require different fields in the form layout The fields in the template can be pre filled with values Before you begin with the Request Template customization configure the following features e Request Field Permission Select the fields that should be made available in the Contact View of the request template The fields in this section includes the request field parameters and additional fields configured in the application e Request Additional Fields I
182. ep Account and Contact Request Summary requests These reports provide you with a high level view of the requests Received and Completed during a particular period date wise These reports are generated based on various parameters such as Category Account Contact Level Mode Priority Support Rep Group Product and Product type These parameters are applicable for both Receive and Completed requests ZOHO Corporation 337 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Custom Reports SupportCenter Plus enables you to create reports that meet your organization needs To create your own custom reports Click on the Reports tab in the header pane to open the All Reports page 2 Select New Custom Report button The Custom Reports form opens 3 Specify the Report Title This field is mandatory 4 Choose the Report Type by selecting either Tabular Reports or Matrix Reports radio button 5 Select a module Request Time Spent Survey and so on for which you would like to create custom reports 6 Click Proceed to Report Wizard gt gt button The next page differs for each report type Generating Tabular Reports Tabular reports are simple reports that allow you to list your data based on certain criteria You can select the columns to view and group the output data If you had selected the Tabular Reports option in step 5 above then follow the steps below to create a tabular report Step 1 Select Co
183. equests assigned to the various support reps configured in the application Requests By Support Rep tr Time Period This month Shawn Adams 3 John Roberts 25 John Roberts 3 Heather Graham 1 Jeniffer Doe 1 Howard Stern 4 You can set the Time Period to view the requests assigned to the support reps for the present month present week previous month and previous week There are two ways through which you can set the Time Period e Select the Time Period from the Widget e Click the Settings icon Ky gt Settings option Set the default Time Period from the drop down Click Save Requests By Support Rep ir j Settings l Set default Time Period This month EZ Save Cancel Hide this widget About this widget Shawn Adams 3 Heather Graham 1 K Jeniffer Doe 1 John Roberts 3 Howard Stern 4 ZOHO Corporation 356 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Custom Widget The custom widget can be customized to display any plain text video or any output that requires a html snippet To add a html snippet enter a name to be displayed for the widget in the Widget Name field Enter a brief description on the custom widget in the Description text field Next paste the HTML snippet or the plain text in the field provided Click Save to display the output Custom Widget Settings My Custom Widget E h Hide this widget My
184. er Organization Settings block ZOHO Corporation 220 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Telephony Server Settings Call Alerts DISABLED Enable Telephony Server Details Telephony Server Avaya sel Currently supports Asterisk and Avaya PBX Server Name IP Address localhost Port 450 TLinks AVAYA CMSIM CSTAFAE ze Username manager Password eoccceccce Save Cancel 1 Telephony Server The server which needs to be configured to enable CTI Currently we are supporting only Astersik and Avaya AES Application Enablement Services PBX 2 Server Name IP Address Server name or IP address of the server which has Asterisk Avaya PBX installed 3 Port Port Number of the Asterisk Avaya server By default the port number for Asterisk server is 5038 and for Avaya AES server is 450 4 TLink For Avaya AES server click Get TLink button to populated the value in the TLink field The TLink establishes connection between the Call Manager and the Avaya AES Server 5 Username The manager login user name to the Asterisk Avaya AES server 6 Password The manager login password of the Asterisk Avaya AES server 3 Click Save on entering the above details The configurations is saved and SupportCenter will try to establish connection with the Asterisk server On successful connection enable the Call Alert status by clicking the Enable button By default this option is disabled Enabl
185. er Plus Administrator Guide E mail the Support Rep A support rep can be notified when a new request is assigned or an already existing request is reassigned to him her using this option To email a support rep 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be replied 3 From the request details page select Reply drop down menu gt E mail the Support Rep option The Mail to Support Rep form pops up 4 The From address is pre populated with the Reply To mail address configured under Mail Configurations under Admin module 5 If the email address of the contact is specified in the application then the same is populated in the To field 6 You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the mail address in CC field 7 If you do not wish to disclose the recipient then specify the mail address in the BCC field 8 By default the Subject and Description fields are pre populated with the specified data Warning A While editing the subject of the email ensure that the request ID value remains intact with the symbols beside it fanless y 9 You can customize the message and content using Canned Response Select the Canned Response from the available list A message alert stating that the Subject and Description fields will be overwritten appears Click Ok to proceed To know more refer Canned Response
186. ernate Email address of the contact phone string Contact Information of the account mobile string Contact Information of the account jobTitle string Job Title of the contact twitterHandle string Twitter screen name of the contact account string Account to which the contact belongs loginName string Login Name of the contact password string Password of the contact description string Description on the contact businessUnit string Business Unit NOTE Please note that the Name and Email address of the contact are mandatory fields If multi tenancy is enabled through Business Units and if the application has more than one Business Unit configured then Business Unit becomes a mandatory field Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 ZOHO Corporation 327 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml addContact status Succ
187. es i H il Il II ER Ig 5 2 il lt Contact Name Aj Contact Mobile Contact Phone Contact Email Resolution SLA Name Ls Request Link Application Name Support Rep Support Rep Phone Dear ContactName The request raised by you Title is resolved Resolution Resolution Regards Support Team Save Cancel 2 Modify the notification Subject and Message by adding or deleting variables to either of the block To add variables to subject and message of the email template just click the corresponding variable in the list box on the right 3 Once you have completed the modifications Save the settings Note For Contract Expiry Notification you need to select Enable Notification check zech 7 box while creating a new contract The Contract Expiry Notification template can also be customized to suit your needs Self Service Login Notification The purpose of Send Self Service login details option under Request gt Contact Notification is to send the SupportCenter Plus login details to the customer via e mail You can also customize the message content from a wide range of variables including the additional fields configured for accounts and contacts If multi tenancy is enabled through Business Units then the Business Unit additional fields for accounts and contacts are also listed amongst the other variables Selecting a variable lists it in the message text field along w
188. es then click the Delete All button ZOHO Corporation 359 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Contacting ZOHO Corporation e ZOHO Corporation Headquarters e Sales e Technical Support ZOHO Corporation Headquarters Web site www manageengine com ZOHO Corporation ZOHO Corporation Headquarters 4900 Hopyard Rd Suite 310 Pleasanton CA 94588 USA Phone 1 925 924 9500 Fax 1 925 924 9600 ZOHO Corporation ZOHO Development Centre I Private Limited Development Center 11 Sarathy Nagar Vijayanagar Velachery Chennai 600 042 INDIA Phone 91 44 22431115 10 lines Fax 91 44 22435327 Sales For purchasing ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus from any part of the world log onto www supportcenterplus com or you can also send a mail to sales manageengine com You can also call the ZOHO Corporation headquarters in the following numbers Phone 1 925 924 9500 Fax 1 925 924 9600 and request for Sales Technical Support One of the value propositions of ZOHO Corporation to its customers is excellent support During the evaluation phase the support program is extended to users free of charge For support please mail to supportcenterplus support manageengine com Alternatively you can submit your feedback from the SupportCenter Plus product by clicking the Feedback link at the top right corner just above the header tabs after logging into the application Your feedback will b
189. es to display the modified levels Delete Satisfaction Level Click on Satisfaction Levels tab Click on Delete link beside the satisfaction level you wish to delete A confirmation dialog pops up 3 Click Ok to delete the satisfaction level Note Deleting a satisfaction level or changing its order has an impact on the previously EN collected survey results ZOHO Corporation 290 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sending Survey On closing a request the survey form is sent via email to the contact to rate the customer satisfaction The survey form is sent to the contact based on the configured Schedule Survey Settings Note The following are the conditions to send the survey form 1 Either a support rep or administrator should have logged in 2 The request must be closed 3 The User Survey option must be enable in the Survey Settings Dear Sharon Harper Please help us improve our service by completing this short survey Your feedbacks and comments will help us to improve our service We appreciate your time here h fi en Thanks and regards Support Click on the link to open the User Satisfactory Survey page SupportCenter Plus Survey User Satisfaction Survey Welcome Sharon Harper Please help us to improve our service by participating in this brief survey Survey sent for Request Title My Iphone display is not working Request ID Created on 29 Oct 20
190. ess statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml addContact status Failure statuscode 6003 statusmessage A Contact with email email address already exists so contact not added Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation addContact is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addContact gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name name value Name of the contact gt lt input type hidden name email value Email address of the contact gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt ZOHO Corporation 328 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide View Read Contact This operation displays the Contact details by specifying either the Contact name Contact ID or the starting alphabet of the contact URL Format The URL format for the Contact operation View Read For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getContact For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getContact Parameters The parameters that needs to be passed
191. ess Unit Settings You can enable multi tendency feature by selecting Enable Business Units feature check box With Business Units in SupportCenter Plus you can manage all your business units accounts and contacts Refer Configuring Business Units for more information Logo Settings You can customize the application by choosing to display your custom logo You need to add the logo in two dimensions one for the login page and the other for the header image that you see on the top left corner of the pages once you login The login page image should be of the dimensions 260 px x 65 px W x H while the header image needs to be 190 px x 30 px To import the login page image Click Import image button Click Browse button to choose the image In the file chooser window select the file that you wish to import and click Open Click Import ee ee The image that you just imported will be replaced instead of the login page image Follow the same process for header image also ZOHO Corporation 300 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Other Settings Max Attachment Size You also have an option to set the Maximum size of Incoming and Outgoing mail attachment in SupportCenter Plus By default you have max of Incoming mail attachment to be 10 MB and outgoing of 5 MB Forum Configuration If you would like to route all the forum posts to SupportCenter Plus as requests then specify the mail address in the giv
192. est details 7 Send the mail for approval Submit For Approval Close Z PO shawn acme com Subject Approval required for a Request 7 e Description Ela lg ne i Vue ze en d i Hi Shawn Regards Bill Thomas Send Cancel On sending the mail the manager receives a Request for approval mail with a link Clicking on the link opens a form with Approve and Reject option along with the request details The manager has to Approve or Reject the request based on the requirement And save the details ZOHO Corporation 109 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Action approve O Reject Comments Save Sub Category Not Assigned Priority High Item Not Assigned Mode Not Assigned Level Not Assigned Created Date Sep 28 2009 05 32 PM Due Date Sep 29 2009 09 32 AM Product Faclities Desk Created By administrator An Approvals tab appears in the request details page beside the History tab All the mails sent for approval is listed in descending order with details like Sent On Sent To and Status of approval Once the request is approved by the manager the status of the request changes to Approved If rejected by the manager the status of the request changes to Denied as shown below Request AccountInfo Resolution Time Entry Activities Approvals History Send For Approval Show All Hide All Sent On 29 Sep 2009 12 27
193. est you wish to edit 3 From the request details page click on Edit tab 4 The request form opens in editable format with the values populated during creating the request 5 Modify the details and specify the Reason for Updating the Request This reason will be shown in the History tab of the request 6 Click Update button to save the changes You are also provided with an Edit button or the Inline Edit option to edit certain request properties ZOHO Corporation 81 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Deleting Requests You can delete individual requests as well as group of requests in SupportCenter Plus To delete individual requests 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be deleted 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Delete option 4 A dialog box pops up asking your confirmation on the delete operation 5 Click Ok to proceed deleting The request is deleted from the list Click Cancel to abort deletion To delete more than one request at a time 1 From the request list view page select the requests to be deleted from the list by enabling the check box 2 Click the Delete button A dialog box pops up asking your confirmation on the delete process 3 Click Ok to proceed The requests are deleted from the list Click Cancel to abort deletion ZOHO Corporation 82
194. esults for any of the text fields of the tasks and events 2 You cannot search for tasks and events based on any of the date fields ZOHO Corporation 49 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding New Tasks You can add new tasks and associate it to a Request Account Contact or Contract from this module The tasks added by you can be a personal reminder of the due by tasks or you can add tasks to other support reps Say if a request involves multi technician work then different tasks are created and assigned to the technicians and each of these tasks are associated to the request There are two ways through which Tasks can be created in the application a Add New drop down b Activities Tab Adding Tasks from Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Task form from the home page Add New ali Request Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact SRO o ER SH To know how to add a new Task go to Step 4 in Adding Tasks from Activities Tab Adding Tasks from Activities Tab 1 Click the Activities tab in the header pane The Activities Tab comprises of the Tasks and Events sub tabs 2 Select the Tasks sub tab The list of tasks assigned to the logged in support rep that is due for that day is listed 3 Click New Task button In the New Task form specify the Title of the ta
195. etrieved ZOHO Corporation 40 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Preferences You can customize your personalization such as the language to be displayed time zone signature attested to all your replies via email and so on Apart from this you can also change your login password 1 Click on Preferences link CH Help Preferences v administrator Log out Dashboards Q 2 The Preference page opens to display the Personalize and Change Password tab By default the Personalize tab is displayed Personalize The Personalize tab consists of display language time zone date format time format and email signature Preferences Personalize Change Password Display Language Choose language Browser default Time Zone Select Time Zone GMT 8 00 Pacific Time US amp Canada Tijuana Date Format Set Date Format 2009 09 Time Format Set Time Format 12 51 PM Email Signature Rita EH HR e Shawn Adams Senior Technician Acme Corporations ZOHO Corporation 41 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Display Language You can select the language to be displayed in the application from Choose Language drop down list say French All the data in the application will be displayed in French Time Zone You can also customize the time zone according to the site where the server is installed The d
196. ettings in SupportCenter PIUS sccccscccs icc ENNEN RN SSES NN ENER RN SNE SNE 305 Request Related Operatons cece eee eee eter teen eee ee eeneeeeeeaees 308 Account Contact Related Operations eee eens eee eee eeeees 322 Solution Related Be E ge EE 333 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus REPORTS sisssisscssscdsassnsnccscanantusnsnacscnsananinenanacanacantninedenstdaseonecs 335 Pre defined REDOl EE 336 CUSTOM eet ee 338 Viewing Ee e EE 341 Query IAG DOICS ue dee EE e 344 Schedule Reports TE 345 Ge ele Le EE 346 Exporting Report as PDF cgscsoseietesanqnss ide dean oa Ea aE r ara wens 347 DASHBOARDS eege eege geed Eege 348 Adding Widgets to Dashboard gen ben g Zeg site ege EA A 351 D shboar dS E 355 APPENDI eege 358 System RE TEE 359 Contacting ZOHO Corporation 22 5 5ei0sseve is cGasiess oust chaagsssliecanereseee eases 360 ZOHO Corporation Administrator Guide Introduction The process of handling service request from the customer to the support rep is manual in many organizations which makes them prone to human error and extremely difficult to manage and synchronize customer information Thus often leading to a significant delay in executing the incoming tickets and tasks ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus is one of the most comprehensive Customer Help Desk Software which can help any business to effectively support and communicate to their customers SupportCenter Pl
197. ew SW modify or edit contracts 4 column wise search option to search for contracts based on contract name support plan and so on R select the columns to be displayed in the list view From the Contract List View page you can 1 Custom and Manage Views Customize the page to display contracts using Custom View option You can create criteria to filter contracts accumulated in the contract list view page Thus sorting and viewing contracts based on your requirements Refer Custom Views e P create filters to customize and organize your contract list view The filters created can be made public or private ZE View edit and delete customized views 2 Set the number of Contracts per page and navigation buttons You can set the number of contracts to be displayed in the contract list view page ZOHO Corporation 151 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 1 60f6 Account Name pport Type Status Contract Acme Corporations Gojci00 per page ent Based Active Naukari Support Plan 3 Incident Based Active 3 Recent Items All the recent items viewed by you is displayed under this block You can navigate back to those pages on clicking on the item link wv Recent Items S Sharon Harper Gj Acme Corporations Resolution for iphon D Maintenan Restart online demo 4 Request based on filters View specific group of contracts through pre defined filters Refer Contracts
198. ewing the Accounts Recent Requests e Sub Accounts Adding New Sub Account Converting Sub Account to Account Associating Contacts to Sub Accounts Viewing Sub Account s request Editing Sub Account Deleting Sub Account OO0O0000 e Viewing Contacts O Associating existing contacts to account O Associating Bulk Contacts to account O Add New Contact to the account e Viewing Products O Associating Products to account e Viewing Contracts O Adding Contracts to account e Viewing Advisory O Adding Advisory to account e Viewing Tasks O Adding Task to account e Viewing Events O Adding Event to account ZOHO Corporation 179 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Details This block displays details of the account that was entered while adding the account information In addition the account details block contains an option to view all the requests raised for that account and also perform operations such as edit and delete on the account Acme Corporation Account Details Edit Account Delete Account Account Name Acme Corporation Account Manager Alan Smith Address 4900 Hopyard Road Suit 310 Kenith Park CA USAUSA Annual Revenue 0 0 95488 Email info acme com Website http www acme com A Phone 974 893 7639 Fax 893 859 9483 Industry Banking Time Zone GMT 02 00 Bucharest Description Topics Template General Domain Names acme com ac com Attachments B supportcenter
199. f the Support Rep from the list You can also assign the requests to yourself on selecting Myself from the list 4 The requests gets assigned to the selected support rep Unassigning Support Rep You can unassign a request from the support rep and move it back to unassigned status To unassign a support rep 1 From the request list view page click the Subject link of the request to be unassigned a support rep 2 From the request details page click Assign drop down menu and select Assign option The Assign Group and Support Rep pop up page opens 3 Click the Choose Support Rep combo box and select NONE Click on Assign button The request gets unassigned ZOHO Corporation 88 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Details Page The View Request page organizes the details of the request in a logical manner To view the details of a request 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on the Subject link of the request to be viewed The View Request page opens Contact Details This block displays the Request id and Subject of the request Contact details such as the Contact Name the Account Phone and Mobile number Status Priority and Due Date for the request Requests gt View request Edit Close v Assign v Actions v Reply v ID 2 Replacement of battery Stat Q Created On Nov 11 2010 03 19 PM poe Pan s Pr
200. f the new request Generally the status is Open level string Denotes the complexity of the new request priority string Denotes the priority importance of the request subject string Subject of the new request description string Description of the new request businessUnit string Business Unit NOTE Please note that the Email and Subject are mandatory fields to be entered while raising a new request If multi tenancy is enabled through Business Units and if the application has more than one Business Unit configured then Business Unit becomes a mandatory field Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters s response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml addRequest status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value sta
201. f you are creating a sub topic specify the Topic Name and select the parent topic as shown below Solutions gt Manage Topics lt lt Back Manage Topics Available Topics Topic Name Replacement for battery Choose a Topics Root a parent topic e Basketball related Queries under which General you want to Golf related Queries add this new e Replacement Queries topic e Support Queries X E Transportation Queries e Warrantly and Support b Add Cancel 5 Click Add button The newly added subtopic or parent topic is displayed under the available topic name list Rename a Topic 1 From the Manage Topics page click on Rename link beside the topic you want to rename The Rename Topic page opens 2 Modify the existing name or specify the new topic name in given text field Click Save button The changes made to the topic name are displayed in the available topics list Change a Parent topic Say you have created a Child Topic Replacement of battery for the Parent Topic Replacement Queries Now you want to change the child topic as a separate parent topic 1 From the Manage Topics page select Change Parent link beside the topic or sub topic you wish to move say Replacement of battery The Change Parent Topic form opens 2 Choose the Parent Topic as Topics Root and click Save The child topic is not an individual parent topic If you want to move the child topic Replacement of b
202. f you require any additional fields to appear in the request template then the same can be configured in Request Additional Fields To access the request template 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Request Template icon R in the Helpdesk Settings block The Request Template list view page opens From this page you can add edit delete and set a request template as default AU e Creating Request Template e Setting Template as default e Request Preview e Edit Request Template e Delete Request Template Creating Request Template Click on Add New Template link This opens the add incident template form view for the support rep The template form consists of three blocks namely Header Field list and Canvas e Header The header consists of the Template Name and Description along with the options to enable the template to support rep or contacts e Field List The field list consists of the fields that are detached from the form You can drag and drop these fields back into the canvas e Canvas The canvas decides the form look and consist of drag and drop area ZOHO Corporation 236 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Form Customization The form layout is customized by re arranging the fields removing fields and setting the field properties in the canvas Re arranging Fields in canvas To re arrange fields in the canvas
203. f you require any further additional information while adding a request apart from the pre set fields in the new request form you can configure them under Request Additional Fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Click on Helpdesk Customizer kon E under HelpDesk Settings Click Request Additional Fields link from the menu list on the left hand side of the page The Request Additional Fields opens You can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the add new request form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields 1 Click on
204. fied in order to renew the contract 1 Click Contracts tab in the header pane to open the Contract list view page 2 Select the filter option from Contract Views block say all expired contracts or contracts expiring in next 30 days Click the Contract Name you wish to renew 4 From the contract details page click Renew button to open the edit contract page containing the original contract rules 5 The contract name is appended with the word renewed You can edit the name but ensure that the contract name is unique and does not have the old name 6 Specify the Contract Number in the given text field 7 All the accounts configured in SupportCenter Plus are listed in Account Name drop down list from which you can select the account to associate this contract If the account name is not listed then you can add a new account by clicking Add New link beside account name field This field is also mandatory 8 On selecting the account if there are any products associated to the account then the same is listed under Products drop down list If you are creating contracts for products then choose the product from the drop down 9 Enter a brief Description about the contract 10 Choose a Support Plan from the drop down list While configuring a support plan if you have specified the Support Type as Incident Based and filled in the values such as No of Incidents Cost per I ncident and Total Cost the same is populated in the new
205. g a Survey e Survey review d e Survey Result lke ZOHO Corporation 287 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Survey Settings You can configure the default messages that needs to appear while sending a survey such as the welcome message survey success or failure message and thank your message You can also choose to enable or disable the survey If you choose to enable the survey you can also schedule the periodicity of conducting the survey To configure the survey settings 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Click on Survey Settings iconfk dunder User Survey Settings From the Survey Setting page select Enable User Survey check box Under the Survey Details block enter the Sender Name Enter the message that you wish to display as the Welcome Message to the user taking the survey GE eto ee 6 Next enter the message that you would display on Successful submission of the survey by the user under Success Message 7 When the survey is taken by a person who has already submitted the answers for the survey then you will have to display a failure message You can enter the same in the Failure Message text area 8 You can also enter the thank you message that will be displayed just before the Submit button in a survey in the Thanks Message text area 9 To schedule the survey in the Schedule Survey block choose the radio button that you wish t
206. g database or even from other applications The application also provides Scheduling a CSV import to keep its database in sync with the customer s database To import contacts from CSV file 1 Click the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Click Import Accounts Contacts from CSV link Step 1 Upload CSV file Click on Browse button to select the CSV file On locating the CSV file from the file chooser window click Open Select the File Encoding from the drop down Click Next gt gt button er ae ee Step 2 Map Columns From this section you can import both account and contact information at the same time Thus establishing the contact account relationship and also self service login to the contacts in just one import For this every individual contact available in the CSV file should be associated to an account 1 Map the application contact fields with the field names from the CSV file 2 Click Next gt gt Click Previous lt lt to go back to Step 1 Step 3 Import 1 Click Import Now button The account contact details from the CSV file is imported 2 Once the import is complete the data on how many records were added how many overwritten and how many failed to import is displayed in the pop up 3 If at any point you wish to stop importing from the CSV file click the Exit button The Login name column is the identifier for contacts So two contacts cannot have the same l
207. g details page 2 The Error Message field contains the complete error message 3 The Module field indicates the module in which the error occurred 4 The Occurred At field indicates the date and time when the error occurred 5 If the probable cause of the error is known then the cause is displayed in the Probable Cause field 6 The Performed By field indicates the origin of the error For example if it is a system generated error then the Performed By field contains System as its value 7 Click Close after viewing the details of the error message None of these fields are editable You can also search for a specific error log details with the help of the Search in feature Search for Error Logs To search for error logs 1 In the left menu the search block is found at the bottom If you are in the Error Log list view page then by default the System Log option is chosen in the Search in combo box If not then choose System Log 2 In the Enter Keyword text field enter the search string 3 Press Enter on your keyboard or click Go The search results will display all the error logs that match the search string 4 Click the error log of your choice to view the same Delete Error Logs You can delete these error logs To delete individual error logs 1 In the Error Log list view select check boxes beside the Error Messages that you wish to delete 2 Click Delete If you want to delete all the existing error messag
208. g the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the new product form 5 Save the settings Configuring Additional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields Click on the Date Time tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings The configured additional fields appear while adding a new product under Additional Product Details block To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save The fields deleted is removed from the Add Product form ZOHO Corporation 255 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Product Commodities purchased by the account are called products in SupportCenter Plus You can either import all the product details into the application using Import Products from CSV Refer Importing Sales Details or you can add the products purchased manually and
209. gt is the name of the server where SupportCenter Plus is installed and lt port number gt is the port where the application is running ZOHO Corporation 122 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solution List View The solution list view page displays all the solution configured in SupportCenter Plus application The page includes various useful functionality such as e option to view solution based on filters e customize columns to be displayed in the list view e set the number of solutions to be displayed per page e search for solutions using search string or solution ID e adding and managing topics On clicking to the Solutions tab in the header pane the page re directs to the solution list view page sdministrator SupportCenter Pe Ae Ae Al Solutions Views i Solutions gt All Solutions Manage Topics Topics Template Recent Solutions All Solutions S All Solutions Qa Search Browse by Topics v Approved Solutions Approval Pending Solut New Solution Delete Approve Actions l 1 40f4 25 per page Solution Drafts a Subject Topic Name Created On Created By A B Rejected Solutions E e Oe nstallation Basketball related Queries Mar 31 2010 12 49 PM administrator Oe How do I reset the admin password General Mar 31 2010 12 49 PM administrator Recent Items oe Upgrading the software General Mar 31 2010 12 49 PM administrator Di Notification not g
210. guration wizard page 2 Click API icon under Organizational Settings block If you have enabled multi tenancy through Business Unit click Global Settings tab gt API under Application Settings block The list view displays the API applications configured in SupportCenter Plus From this page you can define an API application edit and delete an application e mail the API Key regenerate and disable the API key Defining the API Application The first step towards the integration is defining the API Application in SupportCenter Plus Click Define API Application link from the list view Defining the API application is a two step process One you need to define the application by entering the Name and a brief Description about the application Two you need to provide permission to perform certain operations Step 1 Define Application 1 Enter the Application Name in the text field provided The name should be unique and is a mandatory field 2 Specify a brief Description about the API Application 3 Click Next gt gt button to proceed with the Application Permission Click Cancel to return to the API list view Step 2 Application Permission The Roles and the Business Units assigned to the API application are configured under this section 1 Select the Permissions beside the modules Only the enabled permissions can be performed by the API application 2 If Business Units has been enabled then the operations perform
211. h Choose the date from the combo box Say 10th of every month Select the time from the combo box Say 10 00 hr Save this schedule A task for cleaning up the database will be sent to you every month on 10th at 10 00 hr helping you to complete the regular maintenance task in advance without any request sent from the users ZOHO Corporation 242 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Notification Rules Notification Rules can be set for request solution contract and activities modules You can configure to send notification and alerts to account managers contacts and support reps on various instances such as notify contacts when requests are closed alert support reps when a request is assigned to them notify all support reps when a solution is approved and so on In addition there may be some default actions that you might want to perform when the state of any item changes These default configurations can also be defined under Notification Rules 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Notification Rules icon za under the Helpdesk Settings block The set of Notification Rules is displayed You can set notification rules for Request Solution Contract and Activities modules Notification Rules Notification Sender address Acme info acme com Edit Request Solution Contract Activities Account Manager Notifications
212. he account belongs ZOHO Corporation 322 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Parameter Value Description timeZone string Time Zone pertaining to the location of the account accountManager string Account Manager for the account Door No string Address of the account street string Address of the account landmark string Address of the account city string Address of the account province string Address of the account country string Address of the account zipCode string Address of the account description string Description on the account businessUnit string Business Unit NOTE Please note that the Name of the account is a mandatory field If multi tenancy is enabled through Business Units and if the application has more than one Business Unit configured then Business Unit becomes a mandatory field Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value
213. he Add Topics Template page opens 2 Specify a unique name Template Name in the field provided This field is mandatory 3 Enter a brief Description about the template 4 Tick the Topics to be grouped under the template Say Support Queries General and so on This field is also mandatory 5 Click Save The newly added template is listed along with the available templates Editing Topics Template 1 From the available templates page select the Edit icon beside the template you wish to edit 2 The Edit Topics Template page opens with the fields pre populated with the values configured during adding the template 3 Make the necessary changes and click Save ZOHO Corporation 147 Deleting Topics Template 1 From the available templates page select the Delete icon beside the template you wish to delete A pop up window confirming the delete action appears 2 Click Ok to confirm the delete operation The template gets deleted from the list of available templates ZOHO Corporation 148 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Contracts Contracts in SupportCenter Plus are the services offered to an account and their associated products for a specific time period These support services are grouped under a Support Plan which determines the due by time for requests raised for the account product For accounts with multiple products each product can be associated with a service contract for
214. he Edit icon beside the Product Type Name you wish to edit In the Edit Product Type form you can edit the product type name and the description 3 Click Save At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Product Type 1 Click the Delete icon beside the Product Type Name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click Ok to proceed with the delete operation The Product Type is deleted from the list If you do not want to delete the product type then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 254 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Product Additional Fields If you require any further additional information while adding a new product apart from the pre set fields in the new product form then you can configure them under Product Additional Fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click on Product Additional Fields icon figs under the Account Settings block The Product Additional fields page opens You can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enablin
215. he requests raised for that account The Account Settings consists of the following configurations industry Mill e Product Type e Product Additional DEE Cu ai e Product s Account Additional Fields Mi e Sales Additional wield A e Schedule CSV Import e Customer Portal settings T ZOHO Corporation 252 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring I ndustry The industry list is used to denote the type of industry to which your customer belongs to while adding the account information of the customer To open the Industry configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Select I ndustry icon iy under Account Settings block The list of Industry Types that are already available in the application is displayed From this page you can perform operations such as add edit and delete on and Industry Add Industry To add a new industry to the existing list 1 Click on Add New Industry link 2 In the Add Industry form enter the Industry Name This is a mandatory field 3 If you wish you can enter the description for the industry type in the Description field 4 Click Save The new industry type is added to the already existing list At any point you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Edit Industry To edit the existing Industry 1 Click the edit icon beside the industry name you wish to edit 2 In the Edit
216. hedule start time 13 Click Add The task is added to the existing list If you have enabled Send Email when a task is assigned to a support rep under Notification Rules then an email notification is sent to the support rep assigned to the task as shown below Dear Jake Thomas Task details are Title Assign Logins to contacts Associated to Request Start date 11 No 2010 11 00 Due by date 13 Dec 2010 19 00 Created By administrator Description Assign logins to the contact Sharon Harper Click for details http localhost 8080 Activity do mod viewTaskkactivityId 2 Regards administrator Clicking on the link in the email leads to the SupportCenter Plus login page where on entering the login credentials the support rep can get started with the task ZOHO Corporation 51 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Tasks The details of the task are organized logically in the Task details page From the View Task page you can alter any details in the task mark the task as complete once the task is finished and also delete the unwanted tasks To view the details of an task 1 Click the Activities tab in the header pane 2 Click the Title link of the task to be viewed Task Details The Task details block displays the Title of the task the user to whom the task is assigned and the name of the user who has created the task along with the created date and time This is fo
217. ice list view page opens From this page you can add edit and delete a support service Add Support Services Click Add New Service link Specify the Service Name This field is mandatory Specify relevant information about the service in the Description field Sow NM E Save the details Edit Support Services 1 From the Support Services list view page click on the Edit icon beside the service you wish to edit 2 Modify the details and Save the changes Delete Support Services 1 From the Support Services list view page click on the Delete icon LZ beside the service you wish to delete 2 A confirmation dialog appears Click Ok to continue The support service is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 265 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Support Plan You can differentiate the level of support offered to your customers using Support Plan The support services provided to the customer is grouped under a Support Plan which helps in determining the due by time for requests Scenario Your organization is providing service contract to Acme Inc for the Support Service Warranty Support and Replacement queries for every 100 incidents Instead of associating these services individually to the account you can group these services as a Support Plan with the Support Type as Incident So for the first 100 incidents your organization will provide support to Acme Inc
218. ick Actions drop down gt select View Full Screen option A new window appears displaying the chosen dashboard in full screen 3 Close the window to exit from the Full Screen view ZOHO Corporation 350 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding Widgets to Dashboard There are over 40 widgets that are grouped under specific headings such as Business Units Requests Account and Contact Contracts Solutions and Others The purpose of each widget is explained in this document e Business Unit Widgets e Request Widgets e Accounts and Contacts Widgets e Contract Widgets e Solutions Widgets e Other Widgets Business Unit Widgets The Business Unit widgets display the result for all the configured Business Units in the application e Pending Requests by Status All Business Units Lists the number of unresolved requests under the status Open Onhold and Overdue across all the configured Business Units e Pending Requests by Support Reps All Business Units Lists the number of requests assigned to Support Reps that remain unresolved across all the configured Business Units e SLA compliance by Business Unit Bar diagram depicting the number of requests within the SLA time and the number of overdue requests across all the Business Units e Inbound Requests by Business Unit Pie chart depicting the number of requests fetched across all the configured Business Unit e Contracts expiry sum
219. iday is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 272 User and Related Settings For making the SupportCenter Plus available and usable for all your customers you need to add contacts and support reps and define their roles This enables the contacts to log in to the Self Service Portal to check the status of the issues reported by them submit requests and search the knowledge base online The added support reps can log in to the SupportCenter Plus application and pick up requests review and resolve requests assigned to them add solution articles and so on The user management configurations allow you to add contacts support reps account managers define roles and login access permissions e Roles ai e Contact Additional Fields e Support Reps SS e Support Rep Additional Fields 3 e Account Managers Peas e Active Directory Authentication da ie e Windows Domain Scan ZOHO Corporation 273 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Roles Support Reps accessing SupportCenter Plus application have defined roles and hence a defined set of tasks to execute You can configure different roles and assign these roles to the support reps accessing the application To access Roles configuration page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wiizard page 2 Click on Roles icon a under User and Related Settings The Role list view page displays
220. ided login permissions to the customer portal Approving Registered Contacts Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contact list view page Click on Registered Contacts link under Views From the Registered Contacts list view select the contacts to be approved by enabling the check box Click Approve 5 You can also approve and provide customer portal login permission to the contact by clicking Approve amp provide login button The selected contacts are listed under All contacts You can remove registered contacts by clicking on Delete button ZOHO Corporation 211 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configurations All configurations for the application are grouped under Admin tab You can access the various configuration options by logging into the application with the username and password of an admin user On logging into the application with the login credentials of an administrator the Configuration Wizard page opens Follow the instructions to proceed with the configurations The various configurations are grouped under the following major heads e Helpdesk Settings e Account Settings e Contract Settings e User and Related Settings e User Survey Settings e Organization Settings Each of these configurations is explained in details in the following sections Gating ege SupportCenter Admin RT up dd New Q Go List View Helpdesk Settings DH e e Ki K t C 2
221. iew for an administrator is public If you are a support rep without administrator login privilege then by default the created custom view is private The option to Make ZOHO Corporation 69 this view as private custom view is not available 5 In the Advance Filtering block select the criteria to be filtered from Column drop down along with its matching Criteria For instance select Priority from Column drop down and is from criteria 6 Click on Choose button 7 From Select Column Data pop up choose your option as High You can select options based on your selected column and criteria 8 Click Add to Filter button to save the filter criteria details The filter criteria is listed in Filter Set block 9 If you wish to add more filter conditions to this view then select the required column criteria amp conditions of the filter 10 If there are more than two criteria specify AND or OR conditions by enabling either of the two radio buttons 11 Click Save Click Save and Add New to save and add another custom view The Custom View is now displayed under Views in the request list view page The custom view marked as private is listed under My Views and the public custom view is displayed along with the predefined filters wv Views vf Lili EU sz My Open Requests My Requests On Hold My Overdue Requests My Pending Requests My Requests Due Today My Completed Requests Open Requests Request
222. ike acme com paul acme com sharon acme com sharonp acme com ZOHO Corporation 199 Search Contacts You can search for contacts based on the keywords and column wise search options using contact parameters such as contact name email ID account to which the contact belongs and so on Search contacts based on e Keywords amp Alphabets e Column wise Search Search contacts based on Keywords and Alphabets Contacts tab 1 Click Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contact list view page 2 Enter the keyword in the search field provided 3 Click Search All solutions that match the keyword provided by you in the search field is displayed Contacts gt All Contacts All Contacts New Contact Delete e Reconcile Contacts CO Name a Login Name Email ISS Sharon Harper sharon sharon acme co Alternatively from the contacts list view page you can search for contacts in alphabetic order using the alphabets displayed Performing a Global Search You can also perform a Global Search that searches the keyword in every module at one go Advance search options such as Wildcard search phrase search boolean search field specific search and much more can be used to make the search effective To know more click Search Tips ZOHO Corporation 200 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide ZOHO Corporation e IP D p m E o a fa Accounts O O
223. ilable canned response Select the canned response you wish to use from the list A alert message stating that the Subject and description field will be overwritten appears Click Ok to proceed The customized subject and message content is displayed Click Send to send the mail to the concern person Click Save if you wish to save the mail to edit it in future Click Save and Send for review if you wish to save the mail and send it for review to the concern authority Enter the mail address of the concern authority to review the reply in the To field If you do not wish to reply to the request click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 105 Adding Resolution Resolution is a documented information on how the issue was resolved This documented information is very useful to resolve similar issue and can be saved in the knowledge base You also have an option to search for resolutions from the solutions database using the Search Solutions link To add resolution for a request 1 Click the Requests tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to add the resolution 3 From the request details page click on the Resolution tab OR Select Actions drop down menu gt Enter Resolution option 4 Check if resolution already exists for the request if not specify the resolution in the text field Edit Close v Assign v Actions v Stop Timer ID 74 Iphone display i
224. ils and Add Widgets to Dashboard section Adding the Dashboard details 1 Specify a unique name to be displayed in the Dashboard The Dashboard Name is a mandatory field Enter a brief Description on the main focus of the Dashboard 3 The Dashboard can be displayed in columns of 1 2 and 3 Choose the Number of Columns from the drop down ZOHO Corporation 348 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 4 If you have selected the column size as 2 or 3 the Column width options are enabled Here you can adjust the width of the columns to suit your needs 5 For updated real time information you need to refresh the widgets in the Dashboard at regular intervals Select the Refresh Interval from the drop down The refresh intervals are from every 5 minutes to every 2 hours If you do not wish to refresh the widgets select Never 6 The dashboard can be made private or can be shared to other SupportCenter Plus users public To enable privacy select Private radio button To share the dashboard with other users select Public radio button 7 Enable the check box beside the widgets you wish to add on the dashboard It is mandatory to select the widgets 8 Click Save button The details are saved and the dashboard appears along with the selected widgets in Switch to drop down NOTE To know more on adding widgets to dashboards refer Adding Widgets to Dashboards Editing Dashboards To modify an exist
225. ilter Filter Set Match ALL of the following AND Match ANY of the following OR Save Save and Add New Cancel 9 If you wish to add more filter conditions to this view then select the required column criteria amp conditions of the filter 10 If there are more than two criteria specify AND or OR conditions by enabling either of the two radio buttons 11 Click Save Click Save and Add New to save and add another custom view The Custom View is now displayed under Views in the Contacts list view page The custom view marked as private is listed under My Views and the public custom view is displayed along with the predefined filters w Views dh All Contacts Recently Added Contact Contacts without Accou Primary Contacts Unapproved Contacts Registered Contacts Contacts associated to My Views Acme Contacts Manage Custom Views You can view all your customized view under Manage Custom Views From this page you can add edit and delete a custom view 1 Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the Contacts list view page ZOHO Corporation 196 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 2 Click Manage Custom View icon The Custom View page opens listing all the created custom views indicates the custom view is public and can be viewed by all users e T indicates the custom view is private and can be viewed only by the creator of the custom
226. in the list view 1 Click on the Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 Click on Column Chooser icon AR The available columns that can be displayed in the list view pops up The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box Solutions gt All Solutions All Solutions Q Search New Solution Delete Approve Actions 1 o Subject Topic Name Created select box Approval Status Attachments Subject Topic Name DD Created On ooa how do i reset the admin password General Sep 28 g sl Public g D Restart online demo Support Queries Oct 5 20 Created By D Save Cancel oo 0 Renaming Admin user General Oct 5 20 C Notifications not generated Support Queries Oct 5 20 3 To remove a column de select the check box and click Save To add a column to the list view select the check box beside the column you wish to add Click Save 5 To change the column order click the up and down arrow after selecting the column that you wish to move 6 Click Save Only the selected columns are added in the solution list view ZOHO Corporation 130 Search Solutions You can search for solutions based on the keywords solution ID and column wise search based on solution parameters such as subject topic name view status and so on from the solutions list view Search Solutions based on e Keywords an
227. ing Call Alert option To enable incoming call alert as a screen pop up 1 From Admin gt Support Rep select the check box Enable Incoming Call Alerts in Call Alerts block 2 Specify the Extension Number of the support rep in the field provided To know more on configuring the support reps refer Support Reps Click to Dial Click to dial option is available under the Request and Contact module of the contacts whose contact information is specified It provides instant calling option to the customer from their request details page 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Select the Title of the request 3 In the request details page the configured phone number and mobile number is displayed just below the requesters name ZOHO Corporation 221 Edit Close ID 13 Replacement of battery Created On Oct 29 2009 10 55 AM Contact tc Sharon Harper Acme Inc 982 682 9762 RB 345 793 4793 S Send Invite Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry 4 Ifthe email id is configured then you can send an invitation for remote assistance to the contact on clicking Send Invite link 5 Select the mobile or phone number link to call the contact A pop up message requesting the support rep to pick the receiver appears on establishing connection Outgoing Call Please pick the Reciever to Talk Pick the receiver to establish the connection between the support rep and th
228. ing dashboard 1 Select the dashboard to be edited from Switch to drop down 2 Click Actions drop down gt select Edit Dashboard option The edit dashboard form appears 3 Modify the Dashboard details and select de select the widgets from the form Click Save button The modified details are saved and the dashboard appears along with the modified details Setting a Dashboard as default Default Dashboards are dashboards that appear when a user logs into the application To set a dashboard as default 1 Select the dashboard to be set as default from Switch to drop down 2 Click Actions drop down gt select Set this as Default option If you have enabled multi tenancy through Business Units and you have configured 3 Business Units with a public dashboard set as default then all other Business Units bear the same default dashboard Deleting Dashboards To delete a dashboard Select the dashboard to be deleted from Switch to drop down Click Actions drop down gt select Delete Dashboard option A dialog box confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion NOTE The delete operation cannot be performed for Global Dashboard ZOHO Corporation 349 View the Dashboard on Full Screen To get a better view of the dashboard select View Full Screen option To view a dashboard on full screen Select the dashboard to be viewed as full screen from Switch to drop down Cl
229. ion say before 1 hr or 2 hr from the Remind me before combo box By default the message would be Never 6 Click Add The new reminder is added to the Reminders list in the home page To know how to perform further actions on the reminder such as changing the status and deleting the reminders refer Reminders ZOHO Corporation 100 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Duplicate Requests If a single request involves multiple issues and to solve the issues it requires more than a single support rep then the request can be duplicated and each duplicated request can be assigned to different support reps Unlike tasks where the owner of the request assigns tasks to different support reps duplicating the request makes it easier for the support rep to take ownership and complete the tasks independently 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request details page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be duplicated 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Duplicate Request option The Copy Request window pops up Copy Request Enter the number of copies to make of the selected request Number of Copies Copy Cancel 4 Enter the Number of Copies in the given text field The maximum value you can enter is 9 If you need more than 9 copies of the request then you need to invoke Copy Request again 5 Click Copy button The copies of the request is as
230. ional Numeric fields Click on the Numeric tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields 1 Click on the Date Time tab 2 Specify the Label for the additional field 3 Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings These additional fields will appear while adding a new contact under Additional Contact Details block To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save The fields deleted is removed from the Add Contact form ZOHO Corporation 276 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Support Rep Additional Fields If you require any further additional information while adding a support rep apart from the pre set fields in the new support rep form you can configure them under Support Rep Additional Fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on the Support Rep Additional Fields icon 3 under the User and Related Settings block The Support Rep Additional Fields page opens You can ad
231. iorit High Contact cc Sharon Harper Acme S gt Due Date Nov 30 2010 03 24 PM L 984 763 7432 P 984 763 7432 Send Invite Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry Activities History You can also perform basic operations on the request like editing a request closing a request and replying to a request From the Actions drop down you can perform further operations on the request such as adding notes tasks events reminders duplicating and merging requests and so on ZOHO Corporation 89 Edit Close e Assign Yv Activities History the warranty period and would like a replace ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Stop Tim b Add Notes b Add Time Entry b Add Reminder gt Merge Request 4PM gt Duplicate Request gt Delete gt Print Preview Activities gt Add Task b Add Event Canned Responses gt Manage Canned Responses gt Add New Canned Response Resolution b Enter Resolution gt Search Solutions Approve gt Submit For Approva Others gt View Contact Details gt View Requests by Contact With CTI integration in SupportCenter Plus you can call your customers saving time and effort in replying to mails Refer Computer Telephony Integration Edit Close ID 13 Replacement of battery Created On Oct 29 2009 10 55 AM Contact KI Sharon Harper Acme Inc 982 682 9762 RB 345 793 4793 fJ Send Invite
232. is displayed in a pop up 2 You can also view the Query in the Query Editor on clicking Open With Query Editor Mailing Report Click Mail this Report button The mail this report dialog appears Select the Format from the drop down Say PDF HTML XLS and CSV Specify the To address in the given text field Specify the Subject and Description of the mail Send the mail oe O ZOHO Corporation 342 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sharing Report The Share button appears on saving and viewing the Custom report You can share reports to all accounts or only to selected accounts 1 Click Share button 2 From the Share Report pop up select the radio button from the options All Accounts Do not share this report and Selected Accounts 3 On selecting Selected Accounts the list of available account name is displayed You can choose the accounts and move them to Selected Accounts block using the gt gt button 4 Click Share The report is shared to the selected accounts You have an option to export this report to HTML file PDF file XLS file and CSV file To know how to export to PDF refer to the section Exporting Report as PDF ZOHO Corporation 343 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Query Reports The Query Editor helps you to create your custom report by defining your query With the Query editor you can join different tables from different modules
233. ist If you have added any Notes to the request then the same can be viewed under Discussion Notes block The notes are displayed in descending order of their date of creation You have options to edit and delete the notes Viewing Account Information The account info tab displays the Contact Details along with the Contract Details associated with the Account Contract details such as Support Type Support Plan Contract Covered and cost per hour is listed under this block Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry Activities History Contact Details eae Contact Name Sharon Harper Email Address sharon acme com Contact number 984 763 7432 Mobile number 984 763 7432 Twitter Screen Name sharon Account Acme Check Now Sub Account Contract Details Contract Covered Maintenance Contract Support Plan Gold Support Type Incident Based Cost per Incident 10 00 You can check to see if the contact is still associated to the account using the Check Now link You have an option to edit the contact details Except for the account information you can edit the remaining fields Viewing Resolution Resolution is a documented information on how the issue was resolved This documented information is very useful to resolve similar issue and can be saved in the knowledge ZOHO Corporation 91 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide base You also have an option to search for resolutions from the solutions database u
234. ist Click Ok 7 Click Add 8 Click Save Edit Business Rule Click the Edit Ion d beside the Business Rule Name you wish to edit Modify the details such as the criteria and actions from the form 3 To edit the Match the below criteria set click the edit icon beside the individual criteria The respective selection window is opened in a separate pop up You can choose more values or remove a few values by de selecting them 4 You can also delete a criteria completely by clicking on the delete icon L beside the individual criteria 5 In the actions to be performed you can add or delete actions that need to be performed on the request that matches the criteria defined 6 Click Save to save the changes performed Ne Delete Business Rule 1 Click the Delete icon beside the Business Rule Name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog is opened 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the business rule then click Cancel Organize Business Rules Organizing the business rules decide the order in which the rule is applied on the incoming request Click Organize Business Rules link The list of available Business Rules appears Select a business rule and click Move up or Move Down button beside the list Click Save PD a ZOHO Corporation 246 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Time Entry Type The requests raised into the application can be a servi
235. it For Approval To henry acme com john acme com Subject Approve request for the Solution 301 under Support Queries H attach File s Attached files Description Add Users for Approval Henry William henry acme com Dear Support Rep John Mathew john acme com b administrator Mailid not configured Your approval is requi be found at http radhika 8082 AddSolution do solID 301 Send Cancel 5 Invoke the icon T to specify the To address The Add Users for Approval pop up listing the name and email address of the support reps with the role to approve solutions e Enable the check box beside support rep whom you want to submit the solution for approval ZOHO Corporation 140 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide es The To text field gets filled with the email address of the corresponding administrator If the email address is not specified for a support rep the check box beside that support rep cannot be enabled 5 The Subject and Description is entered as given in Notification Rules email template If required you can modify the subject and description content manually else you can change the same from the Notification Rules email template 6 You can attach relevant files by selecting Attach File button 7 Click Send to submit the solution for approval The mail notification is sent to the person addressed in the To fiel
236. it Reminder link ZOHO Corporation 57 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Posting your response to the Invitation If you are a participant of an event then an invitation via email is sent as shown below Dear Jake Thomas Event details are Title Team Meeting Associated to Account Start date 01 Nov 2010 16 00 End date 01 Nov 2010 19 00 Location conference hall Description Team Meeting Post your Response at http Aocalhost 8080 approval EventResponse jsp action responseForEventk amp activityId 902 userld 603 Regards administrator This message template can be customized under Notification Rules gt Activities module gt Notify participants by Email when they are invited for an event To respond to the invitation click on the link given in the email You will be routed to a page displaying the event details If you are sure to attend the event click Yes radio button If you are unsure of your participation select Maybe If you are unable to attend the meeting select No radio button Post your comments in the text as shown Click Add Your response will be saved Click Close link to close the window ManageEngne Acme Inc Event Your Response SupportCenter e Event Details Title Team Meeting Associated to Account Start Time Nov 1 2010 04 00 PM Location conference hall Description Team Meeting Will you attend Yes O Maybe O No Post comment Yes
237. ith the field type So when a new contact is added in SupportCenter Plus the message and the variable customized in the template is sent to the contact via email Note 1 If an additional field is selected in the message template but a value is not in lentered in the add new contact account form then the additional field does not EN appear in the email sent to the contact 2 The additional fields does not appear if the contact is provided with the login details from Unapproved Contacts list view Configuring Business Rules ZOHO Corporation 244 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide You can define rules to organize all your incoming requests and perform actions ranging from routing requests to groups to assigning status and other parameters to a request To open the Business Rule configurations page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Business Rule icon under the Helpdesk Settings block The resulting page displays the list of available business rules You can add edit or delete business rules Add New Business Rule 1 Click Add New Business Rule link 2 Enter Business Rule details such as the Rule Name and a Description for the business rule The Rule Name is a mandatory field 3 Define Rules and Criteria that need to be satisfied by the incoming request Set the criteria from Select Criteria and the corresponding Co
238. ithout administrator login privilege then by default the created custom view is private The option to Make this view as private custom view is not available 5 In the Advance Filtering block select the criteria to be filtered from Column drop down along with its matching Criteria For instance select Topics Template from Column drop down and is from criteria 6 Click on Choose button 7 From Select Column Data pop up choose your option You can select options based on your selected column and criteria 8 Click Add to Filter button to save the filter criteria details The filter criteria is listed in Filter Set block ZOHO Corporation 171 9 10 11 Accounts gt Custom Views Add Custom View Define Custom View View Name Topics Template Make this as a private custom view Advanced Filtering Topics Template sl is v General Choose Add to Filter Filter Set Match ALL of the following AND Match ANY of the following OR Save Save and Add New Cancel If you wish to add more filter conditions to this view then select the required column criteria amp conditions of the filter If there are more than two criteria specify AND or OR conditions by enabling either of the two radio buttons Click Save Click Save and Add New to save and add another custom view The Custom View is now displayed under Views in the Accounts list view page The custom view marked as private is
239. ivate conversation as Public If the support rep is unable to resolve a request and requires further assistance then the support rep has an option to forward the request to other support reps By default the forward sent by the support rep are made private in the conversation thread Hence the conversation thread between the support reps cannot be viewed by the contact If the conversation thread between the support reps involve a solution to the request then you have an option to mark a private conversation as public 1 Click on the Private icon E Select Mark as Public link A dialog box appears stating the conversation status has been changed Click Ok to proceed The conversation is made Public and is indicated with the icon l Split As New Request EE SE The conversation thread from the contact can be split into a new request To split a conversation into a new request 1 Click Expand Au radio button beside the contact conversation thread 4 a TOP View Contact Conversations View All Conversations gt Ee From Jake Thomas On Sep 25 2009 10 35 AM a v A From Sharon Harper On Sep 25 2009 10 36 AM KI To Subject Re Request ID 63 Iphone display is not working Hi Jake My name is Sharon Harper and I had purchased the iphone on the 25th June 09 at the iphone store in New York Regards Sharon Harper Reply Forward View History Split as New request Delete ZOHO Corporation 95
240. ject Ber Request ID 112 replace the battery of Iphone Canned Responses 7 Insert Solution Select a Topic Select a Title a e Basketball related Queries Si Password reset for administrator s General logi e Golf related Queries Changing the battery of the Iphone In Solution e Replacement Queries d d e Support Queries e Transportation Queries Warranty Queries 11 Click Attach File s button to add files as attachments to the mail 12 Click Send to send the mail to the concern support rep 13 You also have an option to Save the request as draft The email saved as drafts ZOHO Corporation 117 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide can be viewed edited deleted and sent for review from the request details page as shown below Requests gt View request Edit My Draft 29 Sep 2009 16 05 Send for review Reply v ID 79 Iphone display is not working Created On Sep 29 2009 04 04 PM TANE ioe Contact Sharon Harper Acme Corporations ess r Due Date Sep 29 2009 05 04 PM L 925 852 2588 P 925 852 2592 J Send Invite Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry History 13 Click Save and Send the request for review if you wish to save the mail and send it for review to the concern authority Enter the mail address of the concern authority to review the reply in the To field ZOHO Corporation 118 ManageEngine Support Cent
241. k available against the custom report that you wish to edit The Report Wizard page opens 2 Modify the necessary details and Save the report Viewing Reports 1 Click on the Edit button The Report Wizard page opens 2 Modify the necessary details and Save the report ZOHO Corporation 341 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Delete Reports You can delete the custom reports that you have created and saved From the All Reports page click Delete link available against the custom report that you wish to delete This will delete the report Saving Reports If you wish to save the report Click Save Report as button Specify the Report Name and share the report as public or private Select the Folder in which you would like to share the report You can also add a new folder if required using Add New Folder link 4 Enter Description regarding the report 5 Click Save The report is saved in the folder specified Get ee Save Report Report Name Reports on Priority This report can be viewed by Every one Public Report Just me Private Report Survey Reports Account Reports SS Timespent Reports Description My Reports Reports by overdue requests Reports by completed requests Reports by pending requests Cancel Viewing Query You can also view the SQL Query used in the database to run the report 1 Click Show Query button The SQL Query of the report
242. ke Thomas lt mike lexcorp com gt 13 14 15 16 17 If the Participants are not present in the users list enter their Email Address manually in the text field provided Multiple email addresses can be entered using comma as a separator Click Add The selected participants are listed in the Participants block of the new event form You can choose to send an email notification to all the participations by enabling the check box Also you have an option to notify yourself when all the participants respond to the invitation The event conducted can be made Private or Public A Public event is visible to all the users whereas a Private event is visible only to the selected participants and you You can set personalized reminders to prompt an email or sms for the event To set a reminder click Add and select the number of days hours before which the reminder should be sent from Remind me before drop down You can choose to be prompted by Email or SMS or both Click Add The event is added to the existing list and an email notification is sent to the selected participants ZOHO Corporation 56 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Events The View Event page organizes the details of the event in a logical manner You can view an event if you are a participant or if the event is made Public To view the details of an event 1 Click the Activities tab in the header pane 2 Cli
243. l loop into the system Acknowledgements for mails such as Out of Office replies notifications that bounce back when the mail destination is not reachable because of a wrong mail address can be stopped from being acknowledged or notified You can also click on Edit Criteria and create a new notification filter You can define a rule stating what mails need not require acknowledgement ZOHO Corporation 302 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Backup Scheduling You can take backup of all your data at regular intervals using Backup Scheduling option 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configurations wizard page e 2 Select Backup Scheduling icon WY under Organizational Settings The backup scheduling page opens Scheduling a Backup 1 Click on Add Scheduling link if you are configuring backup for the first time 2 Enable Backup Schedule using the radio button 3 Select the date to Start the backup from the calender icon 3 And also select the Time in hours and minutes from the respective drop down 4 You can schedule the backup process for every n number of days Select the Number of days from the drop down 5 You have an option to either perform backup of the entire data available or the backup of data without the attachments Select the corresponding radio button for Backup Type 6 Specify the Backup Location to store the backup files 7 Click Save The backup taken
244. lds in the Description text field 4 Save the settings Configuring Additional Date Time fields Click on the Date Time tab Specify the Label for the additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional fields in the Description text fields 4 Click Save to save the settings The configured additional fields appear while adding a new account under Additional Account Details block To delete a user defined fields instead of adding the label names delete the existing label names you wish to remove from the fields of the form and click Save The fields deleted is removed from the New Account form ZOHO Corporation 257 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sales Additional Fields If you require any further additional information while importing sales details then you can define your own sales additional fields apart from the pre set fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Click the Sales Additional Fields icon Ce the Account Details block The Sales Additional fields page opens You can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Sel
245. le and disable the check box beside the permissions and also select the Business Units for API operations 5 Save the changes Regenerating the API Key To regenerate the API key of an application from the list view 1 Click More Actions drop down beside the API application gt select Regenerate API Key option A confirmation message to regenerating the API Key appears 2 Click Ok to proceed The regenerate API Key is displayed along with a success message 3 Specify the Email ID of the user to whom the key should be sent Click Send API Key button The key is generated and sent to the concern user Disable API Key When the API Key is disable the API application is disabled simultaneously and further operations such as edit and regenerating the key cannot be performed To disable the API Key 1 Click More Actions drop down beside the API application gt select Disable API Key option A message confirming the disable operation appears 2 Click Ok to proceed The API application is disabled in the list view ZOHO Corporation 306 To enable the API Key 1 Click More Actions drop down beside the API application gt select Enable API Key option The API application is enabled in the list view Deleting the API Application Click More Actions drop down beside the API Application to delete Select Delete API Application option A message confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The AP
246. led subjected to your licences On enabling Active Directory Authentication option under Settings in the Admin module support reps can log into the application using their AD Login name and choosing their Domain from the drop down Edit Support Rep While editing a support rep apart from modifying the support rep details you can provide login credentials to support reps reset their password and remove login permissions To edit the support rep information 1 Click the Edit icon of the support rep to be edited 2 From the edit support rep page modify the details and Save the changes Reset the Password You can also change the password of the support rep from the Edit Support Rep form 1 Click the Reset Password link under Login Details block The Reset Password form opens 2 Enter the New Password in the field provided as shown below Reset Password Reset Password To reset password of a AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus user Mandatory Field Login Name jake New Password Jakei23 Note Application is currently configured NOT to E mail contacts on Customer Portal login details This can be enabled from Notification Rules form in Admin Reset Password Close 3 Select Reset Password button If you do not wish to change the password click Close button 4 Click Save in the Edit Support Rep form ZOHO Corporation 280 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide
247. lete icon beside the role name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog box appears Click Ok to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the role then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 275 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Contact Additional Fields If you require any further additional information while adding a new contact apart from the pre set fields in the new contact form you can configure them under Contact Additional Fields You can add text fields numeric fields and date type fields in the form To add additional fields 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on the Contact Additional Fields icon 2 under User and Related Settings block The Contact Additional Fields page opens You can add up to 12 text fields four numeric and date time fields Configuring Additional Text fields By default the Text tab is selected Specify the Label for the Additional field Specify any relevant information about the additional field in the Description text field 3 Select the Type of the text field by enabling the radio button It can be either Single Line Multi Line or Pick List drop down list For Pick List fields the added values can be rearranged using the Up and Down buttons 4 You can also specify default values to be pre filled in the new contact form 5 Save the settings Configuring Addit
248. lid mail address You can enter only one mail address at a time Remote Assistance Setup Remote assistance facility is powered by FAX Meeting To avail this option you need to have a Zoho Account New to Zoho Signup i a Remote Assistance Service Details a aa ee S Please enter valid email address for Zoho Username rradhika Edit Info Test Remote Assistance testing Your can change your Zoho Account details Username and Password o _Shawnadam zohocorp com Multiple email IDs vill not be accepted Send Invite Cancel 7 Click Send Invite 8 You need to run the Zoho meeting application to enable remote assistance Click Run button Note If auto installation fails select run this exe link to start the meeting For more information on joining the session refer http zmeeting wiki zoho com J oining the Remote Assistance Session html 9 You can also change your Zoho Username and Password on clicking Edit Info link ZOHO Corporation 250 Inviting Contacts from Request Details page While viewing the request of a contact from the request details page the support rep has an option to Send an Invite for Remote Assistance to the contact Requests gt View request f Edit Close v Assign v Actions v Reply v ID 1 Blank Page while accessing the client after windows update tat Q Created On Jun 29 2009 11 39 AM Sees PER Priori Normal Contact 2 Shawn Paul
249. listed under My Views and the public custom view is displayed along with the predefined filters w Views d i Account Views All Accounts Recently Added Account Accounts Having Contra Accounts With SubAccou Accounts with Products My Views Topics Template Manage Custom Views You can view all your customized view under Manage Custom Views From this page you can add edit and delete a custom view 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page Click Manage Custom View icon The Custom View page opens listing all the created custom views e indicates the custom view is public and can be viewed by all users e M indicates the custom view is private and can be viewed only by the creator of the custom view ZOHO Corporation 172 Accounts gt Custom Views Custom Views New Custom View Delete F Filter Name Created By Ol SG Accounts with Products administrator 0g ko Topics Template administrator Note 1 If you are the administrator then you can view all your customized private and public views 2 If you are a support rep then you can add only private custom views Edit Custom Views To edit a custom view 1 Click the edit icon beside the filter name you wish to edit 2 From Edit Custom View page edit the details 3 Click Save You can also add a new custom view by clicking Save and Add New button Delet
250. ll be dropped and no new request will be created out of them To configure Spam Filter 1 2 Click on the Spam Filter tab Define a rule by selecting a Criteria and Conditions from the respective drop down Say Sender contains Specify the filter content in the given text field by clicking the choose button Say the criteria is SENDER and Condition is CONTAINS then the content can be xyz acme com Click Add to Rules button You can add more than one rule and select Match all of the following AND or Match any of the following OR radio button to match the rule Save the details ZOHO Corporation 216 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Mail Configuration The email address to which the service requests are sent and should be fetched by SupportCenter Plus application is configured under Mail Configuration If you have enabled multi tendency the email address of the respective Business Units can be configured such that the mails are routed to the particular Business Unit e Incoming Email IDs The email address to which the service requests are sent e Sender Name The name to appear in the mail beside sender s mail ID while sending mails from the application e Reply To Address The email address to which the reply needs to be sent Customers sends email requests Organization Mail Server copy of the emails Falls into the Other Mailbox Accounts Support Email Account ACME Support E
251. ll with a known contact whose contact information is mentioned in the application either enter the Contact Name or use the Search Contact icon to search for the contact 1 If you enter the contact name SupportCenter Plus will given you options to choose the contacts relevant to the name specified Contact Details sharon FAE Name Sharon Harper Account Phone i Sharon Philips Category Details sharonp acme com ZOHO Corporations Category Select Category _ ae ay Select Sub Category You can also search for contacts using the Search Contact icon a The Contact List pop up window opens Search Contact List Go Contact List All A B C D E F G H 1 3 K L M N 0 P oO RIES T u v w X Y 2 Add Contact 1 2o0f2 10 per page K Name a Login Name E mail Account Job title CO m ZA g2 Sharon Harper sharon sharon acme com ZOHO Corporations Engineer amp E Sharon Philips sharonp acme com ZOHO Corporations Engineer 3 Click on the hyper linked name of the contact The contact name gets ZOHO Corporation 76 Note Er 8 9 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus populated in the new request form If there are any contact details associated with the contact such as Account Phone Email and Mobile then the relevant details is populated in the respective fields 1 From this page you can Add New Contact if the contact name
252. lled as a Plugin on MS Outlook which can be used to synchronize the contacts between MS Outlook and SupportCenter Plus SupportCenter Plus also provides a CSV based option to keep it s database in synch with your organization s customer database Importing from Outlook The SupportCenter Plus Outlook edition is productivity enhancement software that can be used with SupportCenter Plus system and Microsoft Outlook The Outlook edition can be installed on user s MS Outlook as a plugin which can be used to synchronize the contacts in between Microsoft Outlook and the SupportCenter Plus To know more on refer www manageengine com products support center outlook integration html Importing from CSV amp Scheduling CSV I mport The easy to use CSV import option quickly imports all the relevant information from the existing database and also provides an option to keep the database in sync with the organization s customer database ZOHO Corporation 191 Contacts List View On clicking the Contacts tab the page redirects you to the Contacts List View page where you can maintain and organize all the Contacts created in SupportCenter Plus You have the facility to Customize the page to display the contacts Option to view contacts based on filters Import Accounts Contacts from CSV Effective Search option through keywords and alphabets Set the number of contacts to be displayed per page Perform operations such as creating ne
253. llowed by the remaining details that was filled while creating the task such as the Start Date and Due Date of the task Status Description and the request contract account or contact to which the task is associated to Activities gt My Tasks gt View Task View Task Edit Mark as completed Delete ajaa E Assign Logins to contacts l Status Not Started Assigned to Jake Thomas by administrator on Nov 10 2010 01 02 PM Priority High Task Details Title Assign Logins to contacts Associated to Request Need login credentials to access SupportCenter Plus Start Date Nov 11 2010 11 00 AM Due Date Dec 13 2010 07 00 PM Task does not repeat Status Not Started Change Description Assign logins to the contact Sharon Harper Reminder 1 day before the task starts Edit Reminder Comments Add comment Added by Jake Thomas Nov 10 2010 01 04 PM Delete Login details is assigned to the contact Sharon Harper You can set a personalized reminder for this task using the Add Reminder link Select the number of days hours before which the reminder should be sent using Remind me before drop down You can choose to be prompted by Email or SMS or both Click d to set the reminder If you have specified a reminder while creating the task then the same is displayed in the task details block You can modify the number of days hours before which the reminder should be sent using the Edit Reminder link Com
254. lock select the criteria to be filtered from Column drop down along with its matching Criteria For instance select Topic from Column drop down and is from criteria 6 Click on Choose button 7 From Select Column Data pop up enter General in the text field You can select options based on your selected column and criteria ZOHO Corporation 127 8 Click Add to Filter button to save the filter criteria details The filter criteria is listed in Filter Set block 9 If you wish to add more filter conditions to this view then select the required column criteria amp conditions of the filter 10 If there are more than two criteria specify AND or OR conditions by enabling either of the two radio buttons 11 Click Save Click Save and Add New to save and add another custom view The Custom View is now displayed under Views in the solution list view page The custom view marked as private is listed under My Views and the public custom view is displayed along with the predefined filters v Views Recent Solutions All Solutions Approved Solutions Approval Pending Solut Solution Drafts Rejected Solutions Topic Templates My Views gt General topics Manage Custom Views You can view all your customized view under Manage Custom Views From this page you can add edit and delete a custom view 1 Click on Solutions tab in the header pane to open the solution list view page 2 Click
255. ls page opens Contact Details This block displays details of the contact that was entered while adding the contact information In addition the contact details block also contains option to view the requests raised by the contact and perform operations such as edit and delete on the contact details Contacts gt View Contact Sharon Harper Can view all requests from Acme Inc and its Sub Accounts Contact Details Edit Contact Delete Contact Contact Name Sharon Harper Account Name Acme Inc Phone 925 852 2564 L Call Mobile 1234567890 H Call Email sharon acme com A Alternate Email sharonharper acme com P Remote Assistance Send Invite Job Title Support Rep Description Support Rep Recent Requests View All Requests Add request ID Subject Assigned To Due By Status Date 3 Password Reset John Roberts Oct 26 2009 12 21 PM Open Oct 26 2009 10 21 AM 2 mail fetching does not work John Roberts Oct 26 2009 12 20 PM Open Oct 26 2009 10 20 AM 1 replace battery request Shawn Adams Oct 26 2009 09 49 AM Open Oct 23 2009 05 49 PM Edit Contact You can also edit a contact from the contact details page 1 Click Edit Contact button 2 The Edit Contact page opens with the values populated while adding the contact 3 Modify the details and click Update ZOHO Corporation 204 Delete Contact To delete the contact 1 Click on Delete Contact button 2 A confirmation dialog appears 3 Click Ok to pro
256. lters 8 New Solution Create new solution and group them to a specific topics Refer Adding New Solutions 9 Bulk Operation e Delete Delete bulk solutions Refer Deleting Solutions e Approval Actions drop down Options to approve and reject bulk solutions Refer Approve Reject solutions ZOHO Corporation 125 Solutions based on filters You can view solutions based on filter from the solution list view page In addition you can also create new filters using the Custom View option to place solutions in specific groups There are some pre defined filters in SupportCenter Plus as shown Solutions gt All Solutions All Solutions v Views Recent Solutions All Solutions Approved Solutions Q Search Approval Pending Solut Solution Drafts Approve Actions Rejected Solutions e Recent Solutions Lists all the recently added solution e All Solutions Lists all the solutions irrespective of the status e Approved Solutions Lists all the solution which have been approved by the concern support rep e Approval Pending Solutions Lists the solutions that are yet to be approved by the concern support rep on submitting for approval e Solution Drafts Displays all the solutions which are not approved and has to be sent for approval e Rejected Solutions Displays all the solutions rejected by the concern support rep ZOHO Corporation 126 ManageEngine Support Center Plus
257. lumns to Display Click Select columns to display title Select the columns to be displayed in the report by selecting it from the Available Columns list and move it to Display Columns list using gt gt button You can also order the column list using upward and backward button Step 1 Select columns to display Available Columns Display Columns Created Time Request ID Category Contact Request Status Last Updated Priority Sub Account Contact Job Title Account Level Subject Request Mode Dueby Time Completed Time Overdue Status Step 2 Filter Options On selecting the columns to be displayed in the reports you need to specify the Filter Options for the columns ZOHO Corporation 338 Click the Filter Options title Specify the Date Filter by selecting the Column Day and Date If you wish to add Advanced Filtering select the Column Name and Criteria from the drop down list Specify the value by clicking on pick value icon e You can add n number of Name and Criteria and match with AND or OR condition Step 3 Select Column to Group 1 Click Column to Group title to open the link 2 Select the column data to be grouped from the Group by and Order by drop down You also have an model column on the right hand side of the page Step 4 Select Summary Type If you have selected any numeric field in the columns to display option then this option will be available Select the column summary
258. m View 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on Create Custom View Ion The Add Custom View page opens TIR Requests EEL Contracts Accounts Contacts Admin Reports Support Visas Requests gt All Requests See All Requests gt My Open Or Unassigned gt My Open Requests TI 1p Subject Status My Requests On Hold O 43 ES E AC not working properly Open My Overdue Requests d C 40 g Ei problem with the software Closed My Pending Requests z CO 521 g 2 Replace battery request Open My Requests Due Today C 46 E ya system crashed Open My Completed Requests O 49 E Cannot restore the backup data Open Open Requests C 48 Very importand and critical Open Requests On Hold z TT 47 ES problem with the laptop Open Overdue Requests z C 45 zg My Laptop is not working Open Requests Due Today CT 44 E Che daily check on server Open Pending Requests C 42 E problem with the software Open Completed Requests CT 41 E Ce virus scanner updation Open All Requests C 34 E ya problem with the software Open El aa E roblem_ with the software Open 3 In the Add Custom View page specify a View Name like High Priority requests This field is mandatory 4 If you are the administrator and want this custom view to be available only when you log in select the check box beside Make this view as private custom view The custom view is made private By default the custom v
259. m if the request to be merged is the correct one you can view the request by clicking the subject of the request This request becomes the parent request Click on Merge Request icon to merge both the requests A confirmation dialog box opens asking your confirmation on the merge request operation 9 Click OK to proceed The selected request is merged and becomes the parent request Say for instance you are in the request details page of Request ID 7 and you choose Merge Request option under the Actions drop down to merge this request with Request ID 10 Request ID 10 becomes the parent request while Request ID 7 becomes the child ZOHO Corporation 85 Splitting Conversation as Requests The conversation thread from the contact can be split into a new request To split a conversation into a new request 1 In the request details page under Conversation block click Expand Au radio button beside the contact conversation thread 4 a TOP View Contact Conversations View All Conversations gt E From Jake Thomas On Sep 25 2009 10 35AM v a From Sharon Harper On Sep 25 2009 10 36 AM a To Subject Re Request ID 63 Iphone display is not working Hi Jake My name is Sharon Harper and I had purchased the iphone on the 25th June 09 at the iphone store in New York Regards Sharon Harper Reply Forward View History Split as New request Delete 2 Click Split as New Request link The
260. mail Account Received here Fetch mails periodically SupportCenter Plus Configure incoming email IDs Ir Configure Incoming Email IDs in SupportCenter Plus e A outed here for respective Business Units support acme it com gt Acme IT ACME Business Units support acme retail com gt Acme Retail support acme telecom com gt ACME Telecom fei ACME IT ACME Retail ACME Telecom ZOHO Corporation 217 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Twitter Settings SupportCenter Plus keeps track of your support queries even through Twitter Your Tweet Updates can be viewed from the application which can be converted into new requests in SupportCenter Plus application You can also organize the tweets related to specific keywords for your convenience To access Twitter Settings configuration page 1 Click Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click Twitter Settings icon under Helpdesk Settings block Configuring Twitter Settings 1 Enter your Twitter account details such as the Twitter Username and Password If you do not have a Twitter Account you can use Sign up with Twitter link 2 If there is any firewall blocking the ports then you need to provide the proxy server setting information Select Proxy Settings link enable Specify Proxy Server Settings radio button 3 Specify the IP address of the Proxy Host name Specify the Proxy Port numbe
261. mary across all Business Unit Lists the number of contracts due to expire for that day the next 7 days and the next 30 days across all the configured Business Units e Announcements All Business Units This widget holds the current three announcements across all the configured Business Units s Requests approaching SLA Violation Lists the first ten requests across all the Business Units that are approaching SLA violation along with the time frame e Requests approaching SLA Violation First Response Lists the first ten requests across all the configured Business Units that are approaching first response time SLA violation ZOHO Corporation 351 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Widgets Pending Requests by Support Rep Lists the number of requests assigned to the Support Reps that remain unresolved Pending Requests by Account Lists the number of unresolved requests under each account SLA Resolution Time compliance by Support Rep Bar diagram depicting the number of requests within the specified SLA resolution time and the number of overdue requests that are assigned to the support reps SLA Resolution Time compliance by Level The number of requests within the specified SLA resolution time and the number of overdue requests with level as a parameter SLA Resolution Time compliance by Priority The number of requests within the specified SLA resolution time and the number of overdue re
262. me If you have enabled Send Email when a task is assigned to a support rep under Notification Rules then an email notification is sent to the support rep assigned to the task as shown below Dear Jake Thomas Task details are Title Assign Logins to contacts Associated to Request Start date 11 No 2010 11 00 Due by date 13 Dec 2010 19 00 Created By administrator Description Assign logins to the contact Sharon Harper Click for details http Regards administrator Clicking on the link in the email leads to the SupportCenter Plus login page where on entering the login credentials the support rep can get started with the task To know more on the operations performed on Tasks refer the Activities ZOHO Corporation 33 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Publishing Announcements You can publish announcements as public to all contacts or only to the support reps The announcement board is available in the login home where the recent announcements is displayed Announcements spew A demo for softcecl A demo for softce A webinar to be conducted for eServer Chennai A webinar to be conducted for eS Nortel network will be down due to maintenance from 2 PM to 4 PM on 15 09 2009 sill he down ING LIUJ YY el nety II be t due to ma s Add New Show All The icons beside the announcements in the home page depicts whether the announcement is public private or
263. ments on the progress of the task can be entered by clicking the Add Comments link Enter your comment in the text field and click Add You can also delete a comment using the Delete link ZOHO Corporation 52 Changing the Status of the task To change the status of the task click Change link beside Status The four states of the task are Not Started In Progress On Hold and Complete Select the status and click e You can also mark a task as complete by selecting Mark as Completed sub tab ZOHO Corporation 53 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Creating New Events Events that take place in the organization such as team meetings conference seminars product launch and so on can be recorded and sent to the participants from the Activities Tab There are two ways through which Events can be created in the application a Add New drop down b Activities Tab Adding Events from Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Event form from the home page p Request aE Reminder Task f Event nes amp Canned Response el Solution LR Contract OH Account S Contact To know how to add a new event go to Step 4 in Adding Events from Activities Tab Adding Events from Activities Tab 1 Click the Activities tab The Activities Tab comprises of the Tasks and Events sub tabs Select the Events sub tab The list
264. n the data will be rewritten and updated in the application Active Directory Settings Enable Active Directory Authentication Schedule Active Directory Import Outlook Configuration While importing the contact details from Outlook into SupportCenter Plus application login details for the contact can be created automatically by enabling the check box The contact e mail id is taken as user name and password Contact Settings Module Tabs Enable the respective check box to show the Solutions and Reports tab to the contacts The contacts have permission to view the solutions and reports Solutions View Users without account can view the solutions to common problems in the login screen without raising a request To view the solutions enable any of the radio buttons to view e Show All Topics All the topics in solutions can be viewed in the Login screen e Don t show any Topics On enabling the radio button no topics can be viewed in the login screen e Show specific Topics Template On enabling this option the topic template gets listed in the combo box Select the topic template to be viewed in the login screen The solutions can be viewed in the following URL http lt server name gt lt port number gt sd SolutionsHome sd Request Cost Information You have options to either show or hide the request cost Time Entry to the contacts You can select any of the options from the following three e Don t show to C
265. n be dropped only in the highlighted area On customizing the form layout you can pre fill the fields with values Click Save The template is added to the available list in the Request Template list view page At any point if you do not wish to add the Request Template and would like to get back to the list view page click Cancel Clicking the View List link on the top right corner of the Request template form will also take you to the Request template list view page Setting Template as Default The newly added request template is added in the list view From this page you can set a request template as default i e when you want to create a new request the default request template form appears Also you can disable the template visibility for the support rep or contacts To set a template as default click Set this as default link beside the template name as shown The default template is symbolized with Vv icon Request Templates Add New Template Template isibility Template Default Support Rep Contact CSS System Defined Template v Edty Edit e This is system defined template Replace Battery Request w v v To disable the template visibility for the support rep or contact click the Edit link gt Disable This Template option The disable template is indicated with icon To enable the template click the Edit link gt Enable This Template option The enabled templates are indicated with icon ZOHO
266. nce Contract Acme Corporations Gold Incident Based Expired CO amp Maintenance Contract renewed Acme Corporations Gold Incident Based Expired O E Service Contract renewed Acme Corporations Platinum Hour Based Expired O E Service Naukari Support Plan 2 Hour Based Expired TI FacilitiesDesk Maintenance Contract Acme Corporations Gold Incident Based Active O E Service amp Sales Contract Naukari Support Plan 3 Incident Based Active Note 1 The search would return the results for any of the text fields of the contract 2 You cannot search for contracts based on any of the date fields ZOHO Corporation 158 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Creating New Contract Contracts are services offered to an account and their associated products for a definite time period You can create a service contract for either an account or the products associated to the account For products associated to the account you can associate multiple contracts provided the active period of the contract does not overlap Adding new contracts The new contract form can be accessed by two ways in SupportCenter Plus application a Add New drop down b Contracts tab Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Contract form the home page e gh LO tos a Call 3 Request X Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Con
267. ndition from the drop down Select the values from the database for that particular parent criteria using the Choose button Say all the requests from the Contact Sharon should be set with Priority as High Select the Criteria as Contact Name and the Condition as is Click Choose button and select the contact as Sharon Click Ok When a new request arrives Define rule Contact Name ARC Sharon Harper Add to Rules 4 Click Add to Rules to add the defined rule to the rules table You can further define rules with criteria and conditions following the steps given above 5 If there is more than one criteria then you can either Match ALL of the following AND or Match ANY of the following OR Match the below criteria Match ALL of the following AND Tei Match ANY of the following OR Rule Contact Name is Sharon Harper Subject contains Warranty 6 Choose the action that needs to be performed on the request from the Choose Action drop down list ZOHO Corporation 245 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Perform these actions Assign to Support Rep v Jake Thomas Actions set Actions CS L SetPriority as High CS L Move to Category Warranty Problem 6 Click Choose button to the select the values for the chosen action Say you have selected the Action as Assign to Support Rep click on Choose to select the support reps from the l
268. nk 1 Edit Delete sya 2 Edit Delete e Content Area Add links to instantly browse through solutions or a submit a ticket from the customer portal You can customize the content area by add new links or modifying the existing links 1 Click on Add Link 2 From the Add Link pop up specify a Name for the link 3 You can also represent the link in the form of an Icon Click Browse to search for an icon for this link 4 f there are any relevant information specify the same in Description field 5 Specify the Target URL and Save the details You can also make all the public announcements recent solutions and popular solutions available to the customer on selecting the corresponding check box e Sidebar Sidebar provides options for Login section to customers and also a Registration option for new customers You can also provide options if an approval is required for the new customers from the drop down Further a Search Solutions field can be provided to search for the public solutions and a Sidebar box containing sections To add sections click on Add Section enter the details and Save Portal Options In the Customer Portal the following options can be provided to the customer by enabling the radio button Show Business Units Show Products and Don t Show Options For non logged in users enable the radio button to show All Topics No Topics or Select a Topic Template from the drop down to be displayed in the cu
269. nt files to the solution Select the relevant parent topic from Topic drop down menu If required enter keywords for the solution in Keywords text box oe ee You can also publish this solution in Self Service Portal on enabling the check box Edit Resolution You can edit the existing solution using Edit Resolution option 1 From the request details page click the Resolution tab 2 Click Edit link on the right hand side of the page The resolution page opens in editable format 3 Modify the details and Save the changes Alternatively 1 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Edit Resolution option 2 The resolution page opens in editable format Modify the details and Save the changes ZOHO Corporation 107 Search Solutions From the request you can search for solutions that might help you solve the issue described in the request To search for solutions 1 Click the Requests tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request for which you want to search for solution 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Search Solutions option The search solutions page with a Search text box opens as shown below Solutions gt All Solutions gt Search Solutions how doi reset the admin password All Solutions Request ID 75 Status Open Category Not Assigned Ee Level Not Assigned Priority High
270. ntact form go to Step 3 in Contacts tab Contacts Tab 1 Click the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the Contact list view page 2 Click on New Contact button 3 From the New Contacts form specify the name of the contact in the Name field This is a mandatory field If the existing contacts have similar names then SupportCenter gives an option to use any of the following user profiles as shown below ZOHO Corporation 202 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Contacts gt New Contact New Contact Contact details Name Sharon Do you want to use any of the following user profiles Sharon Harper sharon acme com Sharon Hinks sharonhink acme com No Thanks E mail Alternate E mail 4 Specify the details such as Email 1D Phone and Mobile number of the contact If the contact has an Alternative E mail then enter the same in the given text field 5 Specify the J ob Title of the contact 6 You can associate the contact to a account or sub account Select the Account Sub Account from the drop down If the account is unavailable in the list then you can add a new account using the Add New Account link The drop down box disappears and a text field appears where you can enter the Account Name 7 Provide permission to the contact to view requests while accessing Customer Portal by enabling either of the radio button e Their Own Requests onl
271. nter the Annual Revenue for the support service for the sub account Specify the Email Phone Website and Fax of the account in the respective fields Select the Type of Industry and Time Zone of the sub account from the drop down list 6 Specify the Domain Names for the sub account The domain name is essential when contacts raise requests for the first time the contact is automatically associated to the sub account with the specified domain name Say John john mycompany com sends an email to supportcenter for the first time and the domain mycompany com is already mapped to the sub account MyCompany Inc then John would automatically be associated to MyCompany Inc The Auto Assign contact to sub account option can be enabled in Settings under Admin module 7 Specify the Address of the account in the given text fields 8 You can also specify relevant information about the account in the Description field 9 If you would like to attach a file with the account then click Attach a file button and attach the document 10 Save the details oe vl ZOHO Corporation 181 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Convert Sub account to Account 1 Click Convert as Account icon as shown in the above image 2 A dialog box pops up asking you confirmation on the change process 3 Click Ok to proceed You can see the changed sub account to account in the Accounts list view Viewing Sub Accounts
272. o field 6 Specify the Subject and Message to be sent along with the report in the respective fields 7 Save the details ZOHO Corporation 345 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Report Settings Report Settings helps you to customize the report column size customize the data and time format to be displayed in reports and options to Disable links grouping per page and specify default values for empty fields Click Reports tab in the header pane to open All Reports page Click on Report Settings button Report Settings page pops up 3 You can customize the Tabular column size by specify the size of the small text large text number size and date and time text 4 If you wish to customize the Matrix column size specify the size of the cell width and cell height and update the changes 5 You can also change the Date and Time format to be displayed in the report If you specify the format in the given text field as MM dd yyyy HH mm then the result would be Date 09 20 2007 Time 03 20 6 You can also customize the Report Font Settings by select the font size for the report title table header and table row from the respective drop down 7 While viewing the report if you do not want to show links then enable Disable link in reports check box By default this option is disabled 8 You can specify values to replace empty values in the respective field 9 Click the Update button ZOHO Corp
273. o g Very importand and critica Open Sep 17 2009 03 05 PM Unassigned Mark Adams Note 1 The search would return the results for any of the text fields of the request 2 You cannot search for a request based on any of the date fields of the request ZOHO Corporation 74 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Creating New Requests Any incident request for service or request for information can be sent as requests to the supportdesk team These requests can be sent to the support team in many different ways Some of the most common modes are 1 Contacts can call the helpdesk reporting their problem or requirement and he in turn will file it as a request For more information refer Log a call 2 They can submit their query by logging into the customer portal and filing a request 3 Or they can send an Email to the support team which will automatically get logged as a service request in SupportCenter Plus Creating a new request from the application A typical example for support reps to create a new request from SupportCenter Plus application would be when a support rep is on a call with the contact The support rep fills in the necessary details for future references The new request form can be accessed by two ways in SupportCenter Plus application a Add New drop down b Request tab Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Request form the h
274. o set as a criteria for sending the survey 10 Click Save The survey settings are saved ZOHO Corporation 288 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Defining a Survey You can define your own survey questions and satisfaction levels that suits the needs of your organization and users To define your survey 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane Zei 2 Click on Define a Survey Ei under the User Survey block From Define Survey page you can add edit and delete the survey questions and satisfaction levels e Survey Questions e Satisfaction Levels Survey Questions Add Survey Questions Click on Questions tab Click the Add Question button Type in your question in the text area provided ee Er Click Save The question is added in the Questions tab You can add any number of questions to the survey by following the above steps As you keep adding the questions it gets appended at the end of the question list You can change the order of the questions by clicking the Move Up and Move Down link that is available beside each question Survey Questions and Satisfaction Levels Questions Satisfaction Levels Add Question Question 1 Your opinion on our service i Delete v Move Down JESTION 4 Your opinion on the turn around time of the i Delete a Move U v Move Down support rep Juestion 3 Your opinion on the product i Delete a Move Up Add Question
275. ock in the home page The tasks can be added by you as a personal reminder of the due by tasks or it can be assigned to you by other support reps From this block you can also add tasks to other support reps On adding the task to other support reps the task will be listed in their home page and the support rep can view the task on logging in to the application You can also add task for Requests Contract Accounts and Contract from the respective module Say for instance if a ticket raised requires multiple support reps to work then separate tasks can be assigned to the support rep Also if users under an account require logins then the task can be assigned to the account 1 My Task views the tasks assigned to the logged in support rep 2 You can track all the task assigned to you by other support reps 3 You can add personal tasks as a reminder of the due by task 4 You can assign tasks to other support reps Note Add New Task You can add a new task either from My Tasks block Add New drop down or from the Activities tab Add N 1 From My Tasks block in the home page select Add New button OR Alternatively you can also add a task from Add New drop down in the home page natal y LQ a Call xy Request Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact En e nes amp re T O 2 In the New Task form specify the Title of the
276. of All Events is displayed Click New Event button 4 Inthe New Event form enter the Title of the event to be held The Title is a mandatory field 5 If the event is associated to a request contract account or contact then select the same from the Associate to drop down Also you can associated it to a specific request account contact or contract using the search icon Note If you are adding the event from the Request Account Contact or Contract details page then the Associate to option is selected automatically ZOHO Corporation 54 6 10 11 12 Select the date of commencement of the event and the end date using the calendar icon 2 If the event is an all day event enable the check box beside All day event Else select the time duration of the event beside the Start date and End date drop down For repetitive event select the duration as daily weekly monthly or yearly from Repeat Task drop down Select the interval within which the task should be repeated from the Repeat Every drop down If the event has an end date select the date using the calendar icon il Else enter the number of times after which the event ends in the text field If the task is non repetitive select Never from Repeat Every drop down Specify the location of the event in Location text field Also provide a brief Description of the event To select the Participants of the events click Add Edit Participants link
277. ogin name since the existence of a contact is checked based on the login name value Warning 1 If by mistake there was any mismatch of fields during mapping and a new import of CSV is performed the records is updated based on the login name value If there were any records that did not have any login name at all or there was mismatch in the login name itself then duplicate entries is created In these cases delete such entries from the contact list and import again or manually edit the information available ZOHO Corporation 190 Contacts ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus allows you to maintain valuable customer information and keep it up to date The customer information includes details of the account associated to the contact and requests raised by the contact Customers can access the self service portal with their login credentials where the status of the request sent by them to the support team can be checked SupportCenter Plus provides two simple ways to add your Customer information a Importing from Outlook b Importing from CSV and schedule a CSV import Easy ways to add your Customer information E AC 8 import from CSV f To enable organizations to quickly populate the customer database SupportCenter Plus provides an easy to use CSV import option to import all relevant information from your existing database e Import from Outlook 39 Schedule the CSV import G The Outlook edition can be insta
278. ok which can be used to synchronize the contacts between MS Outlook and SupportCenter Plus I mporting Accounts Contacts from CSV file Importing Accounts Contacts from CSV link is found under the Accounts and Contacts module SupportCenter Plus also provides Scheduling CSV Import to keep its database in sync with the customer s database The CSV Import consists of three steps Step 1 Upload CSV file Click on Browse button to select the CSV file On locating the CSV file from the file chooser window click Open Select the File Encoding from the drop down Click Next gt gt button EA ZOHO Corporation 13 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Step 2 Map Columns From this section you can import both account and contact information at the same time Thus establishing the contact account relationship and also self service login to the contacts in just one import For this every individual contact available in the CSV file should be associated to an account 1 Map the application contact fields with the field names from the CSV file 2 Click Next gt gt Click Previous lt lt to go back to Step 1 Step 3 Import 1 Click Import Now button The account contact details from the CSV file is imported 2 Once the import is complete the data on how many records were added how many overwritten and how many failed to import is displayed in the pop up 3 If at any point you wish to s
279. om a variety of sources email phone calls forums web portal from various regions across the globe The request module functions as the customer support desk where requests are fetched from the mail server at regular intervals and routed to the respective Business Units from where necessary solutions are provided by assigning support reps to resolve issues reported Solutions Module This module serves as a knowledge base for your customer support team as well as your customers Customers can search this for solutions for issues and solve it themselves Also when support reps resolve issues they can directly convert these resolutions as knowledge base articles Contracts Module Contracts are the services offered to an account and their associated products for a specific time period These support services are grouped under a Support Plan which determines the due by time for requests raised for the account product Thus based on the associated contracts any request raised for the account product should be resolved based on the support plan and applied due by time Accounts Module With this module all your valuable customer information can be maintained and kept up to date The account information gives you details of their contacts the products purchased and the kind of support services that needs to be provided to them Furthermore for accounts with branches in different locations each branch is added as a sub account of the account
280. ome page HENA Q Log a call ETA KORIA Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact An e JS TES rey 1 Wi 8 To configure the New Request form go to Step 3 in Request tab Request Tab 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Select New Request button The New Request form opens ZOHO Corporation 75 3 If you have specified Request Default Values for Category Level Mode Priority and Group to be displayed in the New Request form then the same are populated in the new request form 4 You can also create a Request Template for the frequently raised requests under the Admin tab Select the template from Apply Template drop down box to create a requests instantly 5 If you have not configured the Request Default Values or the Request Template specify the request details such as Mode of submission of request Level of complexity of the request and Priority 6 By default the Status of the request is Open 7 Support Rep assigned to the request are also known as Owner You can either select the Group according to the request or choose the Support Rep alone Say if the request is for Replacement of battery then select the Group as Warranty The list of support reps associated to Warranty group is listed under Support Rep drop down To associate support reps to specific groups refer Groups 8 If you are on a ca
281. on of the status 5 Click Save to save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel N Delete Status 1 Click the Delete icon beside the status name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click OK to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the status then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 229 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Level Request level is a measure to indicate the complexity of a request so that the request can be assigned to support reps experienced enough to handle the requests Say if the request contains information and does not require any action to be taken it can be classified as Tier 1 If there is a minor level action such as providing the contact some tips to resolve the issue it can be classified as Tier 2 and so on 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page HA V 2 Click the Helpdesk Customizer icon Se under Helpdesk Settings 3 Click Level from the left menu The Level List page is displayed You can add edit or delete the request levels Add Level 1 Click Add New Level link 2 Enter a unique name to identify the level in the Name field 3 If required you can enter the level Description 4 Click Save The new level gets added to the already existing list Edit Level 1 Click the Edit icon beside the level name
282. ons Based on the roles assigned the Dashboards are customizable to suit the user s perspective Many such dashboards can be created and sorted by a single user The widgets display specific information and is illustrated in the form of a pie chart bar diagram line diagram or as a list These widgets can be concealed and rearranged in the canvas Further additional information can be obtained on hovering over the bar diagram or pie chart on the widget Public Dashboards appear in all the configured Business Units in the application Any changes made in the public dashboard adding new widgets or removing a widget of one business unit effects the dashboard of all other configured Business Unit Note 1 If you have enabled multi tenancy through Business Unit select the Business E Unit for which the Dashboard should be created and then proceed with the dashboard configurations 2 Dashboard can be customized by users with specific role permission Refer Roles to know more The following are the topics discussed under this section e Creating a New Dashboard e Editing existing Dashboards e Setting a Dashboard as Default e Deleting Dashboards e Viewing the Dashboard on Full Screen Creating New Dashboard The New Dashboard form can be accessed from the Dashboard tab by es Clicking New Dashboard button or e Select Switch to drop down gt New Dashboard option The New Dashboard form is separated into Dashboard Deta
283. ontacts The request cost is not shown to the contacts e Show only to primary Contacts The request cost is shown only to the Primary Contact e Show All contacts The request cost is available to all contacts ZOHO Corporation 299 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide e Contact Details If you wish to allow the contacts to edit their profile then select Allowed to edit their profile else select Not allowed to edit their profile e Show Account Information to Contact s Certain account information may contain vital facts that requires concealment from the contacts To refrain the contacts from viewing the account information in the request details page click No radio button Click Yes radio button to allow the contacts to view the account details e Show Reminders to Contact If you wish to show reminder option to contacts then select Yes radio button else select No option The reminders will be shown right top of the web client e Support Reps availability information If you wish show the support teams availability information to the contacts then click Yes radio button else select No option The availability will be shown in the home page under Support Team tab Support Rep Settings Set the support rep s default online status by selecting the radio button If you wish to show the support team s availability information to the support rep enable Yes radio button else select No Busin
284. ontacts associated to the account once they login to the application using their login credentials Unassigning Topic Template 1 From the Accounts list view page enable the check box beside the account name to be unassigned of topics templates 2 Click the Topics Template drop down and select the Unassign Template option You can see the topics name removed under the Topics Template title in the All Accounts page Viewing Topics Template To view the Topic Template assigned to an account 1 From the accounts list view page click on the Account Name The Accounts Detail page opens 2 Under the Account Details block click the hyperlink of the Topics Template name to view the services provided Accounts gt View Account Details AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Pl Beals Solution TopicsTemplate Account s Requests Edit Account Delete Account Account Manager Alan Smith General N2 Following topics will be visible to the Account wv General it http www zoho com x Replacement Queries 1 925 924 9600 x Support Queries i GMT 04 00 Atlantic Time Canada Topics Template RER ZOHO Corporation 188 Importing Sales details from CSV File The Sales details include the products purchased by the Accounts along with the details such as date of sale warranty period number of units purchased and so on You can either import sales details from other application or you can directly impor
285. ontacts raise requests for the first time the contact is automatically associated to the account with the specified domain name Say John john mycompany com sends an email to supportcenter for the first time and the domain mycompany com is already mapped to the account MyCompany Inc then John would automatically be associated to MyCompany Inc The Auto Assign contact to account option can be enabled in Settings under Admin module Specify the Address of the account in the given text fields Specify relevant information about the account in the Description field If you would like to attach a file with the account then click Attach a file button and attach the document Save the details ZOHO Corporation 178 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Details Page The details of the account added by you while creating the account is displayed under Accounts Details page You can edit delete and view the requests associated to the account from this page In addition you can associate contacts and products add contacts advisory and sub account to the account To view the accounts details page 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts details page 2 Select the Account Name link of the account to be viewed The View Account Details page opens The following topics are discussed in this section e Viewing Account Details O Editing Account O Deleting Account e Vi
286. op down 4 Save the details Monthly Schedule To run a monthly maintenance task click Monthly Schedule radio button Select the month to run the task by enabling the check box beside Every Month Select the Date on when the task should be scheduled from the combo box Select the Time at which the task should be scheduled from the combo box Save the details E 2 SS E Periodic Schedule To run a periodic maintenance task click Periodic schedule radio button 1 Specify the day s in the given text field to schedule the maintenance task i e after every specified nth day the maintenance task will be executed 2 Save the details One Time Schedule To run a one time maintenance task click One Time Scheduling radio button 1 Select the Date amp Time on when the maintenance task should be executed 2 Save the details ZOHO Corporation 241 Scheduled Requests Schedule a new request EN Request Template Scheduled Request A Scheduled Request Daily Schedule Monthly Schedule Weekly Schedule wi Moni Monthly Schedule SSES ah Periodic Schedule January February March April One Time Schedule kl may June July August M September October Jl November December On Date 10 v At Time Hours 10 Minutes 00 e Save Cancel If you wish to schedule a monthly task for cleaning up the database 1 2 3 4 5 Select Monthly Schedule radio button Select the check box every mont
287. operation you can add notes to the existing requests URL Format The URL format for the Request operation Adding Notes for a request For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addRequestNote For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json addRequestNote Parameters The following parameters need to be passed via HTTP method JL string Request ID of the request comment string Note added to the request isPublic True False If True the note can be viewed by all users public If false the note can be viewed only by support reps private Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 315 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Response response uri api xml addRequestNote status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not vali
288. opriate radio button to suit your needs from the following e All Support rep can view all the requests received in SupportCenter Plus s Allin Group amp assigned to him Support rep can view all the requests associated to his group and also the requests that are assigned to him e Assigned to him Support rep can view only those requests that are assigned to him her only You can also provide permission to approve solutions for this role by enabling the check box beside Support Reps allowed to Approve solution You can provide permission to modify the due by date and first response due by time while editing a request on selecting the check box beside Support Reps allowed to Edit DueBy Date and First Response Dueby Time Furthermore you can provide permission to merge requests raised in the application by enabling Support Reps allowed to Merge Requests check box On selecting this option the support rep has the ability to merge requests from the request list view page and also from the details page of a request To know more on merging requests click here Enter the Description for the role you are adding Click Save The Role is added to the list of available roles in the list view page Edit Role 1 2 Click on the Edit icon beside the role name you wish to edit Modify the details and Save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Role Click the De
289. options available for each column Column summary options are count sum average maximum value and minimum value Select the column summary options by enabling the check box These selected column summary will be displayed in the reports Step 5 Charts Choose the chart type to show the result in graphical format 1 Clicking the Charts title opens the choose a chart type page 2 Select the Chart Type from the combo box Say Pie chart or Bar chart and so on On selecting the chart type a model chart type is displayed on the right hand side of the page 3 Select Rum Report gt gt button On running the report you get a tabular report as well as the graphical view for the selected column data Step 5 Charts Chart Type Ce Chart Type PieChart 2D PieChart 3D BarChart 2D BarChart 3D Stacked Bar Chart 2D Stacked Bar Chart 3D Ring Chart ZOHO Corporation 339 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Generating Matrix Reports Matrix reports provides the data in a grid manner m x n format It allows you to study different scenarios based on the chosen criteria If you have selected the Report Type as Matrix Report follow the steps below Step 1 Select Column to Group You have simple grouping and advanced grouping option for matrix reports Simple Grouping 1 Click the Simple tab A sample matrix is displayed with options to select the Top column information and lef
290. oration 346 Exporting Report as PDF You can export the report as PDF and save the PDF version of the report for future reference To export a report 1 Generate the report that you want To know how to generate a report refer to the Viewing Helpdesk Reports topic 2 Inthe report view click on any of the Export options say PDF 3 If you have a PDF reader Acrobat Reader you will be asked if you want to open the document in your default PDF reader Or else you can choose to save the PDF document to your disk by selecting the Save to Disk radio button If you want to open the PDF in a PDF reader then leave the default selected option as is Opening SupportCenterReport pdf You have chosen to open Zi SupportCenterReport pdf which is a Adobe Acrobat Document from http assetmamt test1 8080 What should Firefox do with this File Open with adobe Reader 6 0 default C Do this automatically For files like this from now on 4 Click OK The PDF document is opened in your default PDF reader 5 Save the PDF document for future reference ZOHO Corporation 347 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Dashboards Dashboards display the real time information of the data specified in SupportCenter Plus It provides a quick view of the activities in the present week present month previous weeks and previous months thereby enabling a user to take necessary decisions and acti
291. orking properly Open My Overdue Requests y E 40 g Ei problem with the software Closed My Pending Requests O 51 g 3 Replace battery request Open My Requests Due Today C ze g y system crashed Open My Completed Requests TT 49 zg Cannot restore the backup data Open Open Requests O 48 g Very importand and critical Open Requests On Hold S C 47 ES problem with the laptop Open Overdue Requests E 45 g My Laptop is not working Open Requests Due Today E 44 g Ev daily check on server Open Pending Requests TT 42 g problem with the software Open Completed Requests C 41 g amp virus scanner updation Open All Requests C 34 E 1 problem with the software Open las E roblem_ with the software Open e My Open or Unassigned Requests All your open requests and the requests unassigned to the support reps are listed under this option These requests are in bold font e Unassigned Requests Lists all the requests that is not assigned to any support rep e My Open Requests Lists all the request that are assigned to you in the open status e My Requests On Hold Lists all the requests assigned to you which is kept on hold e My Overdue Requests Displays requests assigned to you that has exceeded the due by time e My Pending Requests Lists all your unfinished and incomplete requests e My Requests Due Today Displays all requests assigned to you that are due for the current day e My Completed Requests All requests assigned to you that are
292. ort plan is applied when the account is not associated to any contract You can set any support plan as default from the Support Plan list view page 1 Click on Set as Default Support Plan icon beside the support plan from the in the list view ZOHO Corporation 266 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 2 A dialog box appears confirming the operation 3 Click Ok to continue The support plan is set as default indicated with the icon Edit Support Plan Click on Edit icon beside the support plan name to be edited From the edit support plan form Modify the required details Save the changes At any point if you wish to cancel the operation that you are performing click Cancel Delete Support Plan 1 Click on Delete icon beside the support plan name you wish to delete A confirmation dialog appears 2 Click Ok to proceed with the deletion If you do not want to delete the support plan then click Cancel ZOHO Corporation 267 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Service Level Agreements Service Level Agreements SLA help evaluating the efficiency effectiveness and responsiveness of your support team You can configure SLAs for each Support Plan and based on the services offered the response and resolution time can be set accordingly ScenariolYour organization is providing service contract Gold Support Plan to Acme Inc and you have config
293. ory P Local Syster Locel Systere Local Service Local Syster Local Syster Vocal Service Local System By indones Prema Internet Connection Sharing ICS vides Locel System By Werdows Image Acquistion WIA s R Local Service KE met Local System W nnns Management rarum ton e Local Sysbere KEEN Managerent Fetzummermg sn Driver Extercions o Local Systere W wandows Service Pack installer update service e Local Systere windows Tne r Ri Local Service DB andows User Mode Orinar Pr argent e Local Service By MrH TTO Web Proxy Auto Descovery Service Lea Servie Local Syster Local Systere Local Syster Local Syster ZOHO Corporation 249 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Browsers compatibility for Remote Assistance e InternetExplorer version 5 5 and above e Firefox Steps for Remote Assistance e Enter your Zoho Account details in Remote Assistance Setup e Specify the Email Id of the contact while entering the contact details Remote Assistance Setup To configure the Remote Assistance Setup 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane 2 Select Global Settings tab e 3 In Organization Settings click Remote Assistance Setup icon RA 4 Specify the Zoho Account Username and Password in the fields provided If you do not have a Zoho Account then you can sign up in the link provided 5 Click Save 6 You can test the remote assistance on selecting Test Remote Assistance and entering a va
294. ost per I ncident and Total Cost the same is populated in the new contract form If you have selected the Support Type as Hour Based and filled in values like No of Hours Cost per hour and Total Cost the same is populated in the new contract form Refer Support Plan to know more Specify the Active Period Start date and End date of the contract using the calender icon If the End date is not specified then the contract is active for ever This field is mandatory All the available support services configured are listed and the services offered by the selected Support Plan are automatically enabled If required you can Add New Service to the list To attach any relevant file to the contract 1 Click Attach to open Add Remove attachment window 2 Click Browse to locate the file 3 Click Attach The file is attached along with its size 4 Click Done to close the page The File attached field consists of the name of the file attached You can notify users before the contract expires by select Enable Notification check box The Available Users list is displayed from which you need to select users and move them to Selected Users list by clicking gt gt button Specify the days before which the user has to be notified of the contract expiry in the Notify before field According to your support plan you can specify the hours and incidents before which the user has to be notified of the contract expiry in the Notify before
295. ou to manage and track all the requests raised from your customer their information and the support service offered to them You can track all the overdue requests that requires immediate attention thus improving the response time and resolution time of your support team Overview of Request Workflow e Users raise requests into SupportCenter Plus application e Check Business Rules e Assign Support Reps e Set Due by time based on Service Level Agreement e Support Reps respond to contacts e Customer acknowledgement for the provided resolution e Close the request ZOHO Corporation 60 Modes of Creating Requests SupportCenter Plus provides 4 simple ways of creating a request Phone The ticket can be created by the Support Staff Email Automatic Conversion of Emails to Tickets Forums SupportCenter Plus can be integrated with phpBB forums and forum posts can be automatically converted to tickets Refer Forum Integration to configure phpBB forums to work with SupportCenter 4 Self Service Portal Ticket submission thorough integrated web forms and customer self service Portal KYN Customer acknowledges the resolution ___ Support Rep Customer Interactions lt SupportCenter Plus Workflow Overview 3rd Party Apps Microsoft Outlook Gm Account amp Contact Management Customer Contract SLA Web Portal gt 49 E mail pew Ticket 7 Check Phone z Workflow Rules ESNI Ve
296. p License Info CH 25 Sep 2010 05 26 A 2 In the Feedback pop up the To address is our support mail id and is in non editable format 3 Specify Your Name Your Email Id the Subject and Message mail content in the respective fields 4 Click on Submit button ZOHO Corporation 43 Activities The Activities tab comprises of the list of Events conducted in the organization and the Tasks assigned to the support reps Events are considered as the team meetings conference seminars or product launch that takes place in the organization The Event and Task can be associated to a request contract account or contact Say for instance if the Event is a team meeting to discuss an issue over the Acme account or a Task assigned to a support rep to change the printer toner In this Activities section we will be referring Tasks and Events as Activities ZOHO Corporation 44 Activities List View ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide The activities list view page organises and displays all the events and tasks configured in SupportCenter Plus The following functionality can be performed from the activities list view e option to view the events and tasks based on filters e customize columns to be displayed in the list view e set the number of tasks or events to be displayed per page e search for tasks or events using the search icon On clicking the Activities tab in the header pane the page r
297. p for notes addition Save Cancel 4 New Request Create new requests on specifying the detail information of the request such as request type priority urgency group category sub category and items Refer New Request to know more 5 Bulk Operation e Edit Request Bulk edit requests with similar information To know more refer Editing Request e Delete Request Bulk delete requests To know more refer Deleting Request e Close Request Bulk Close of all the completed requests To know more refer Closing Request e Merge Requests Merge two or more similar request While merging requests the newly added requests are taken as the child request while the older request is the parent request To know more refer Merging Request e Assign To Assign bulk requests to support reps To know more refer Assigning Unassigning Support Reps ZOHO Corporation 66 Requests Based on Filters You can view requests based on filters from the request list view page In addition you can also create new filters using the Custom View option to place requests in specific groups There are some pre defined filters in SupportCenter Plus as shown tuum Requests Mt Uitte Sie ellie at mee Cael ic el cole ln TTT a A SNORE Reguests gt All Requests aS All Requests My Open Or Unassigned TB Reids New Request Edit Delete Close Merge Assign to e My Open Requests TT 1p Subject Status My Requests On Hold CT 43 ES E AC not w
298. page Specify the contract details and Save the changes For more information refer Add New Contract page You can see the newly added contract getting displayed under the Contracts block ZOHO Corporation 184 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding Advisory You can add advisory notes about the account that includes consultative opinions announcements of issues contract expiry notice and so on You also have an option to display the advisory in the request details page For instance a Service Contract for a printer has expired and a request on servicing the printer is raised to your support team In this case add a advisory stating that the Maintenance Contract for the printer has expired and display it in the request details page So that the support rep assigned with the request will be aware that the contract for the product has expired and will take necessary steps Requests gt View request Maintenance Contract expires on 3rd August 2009 Edit Close v Assign e Actions vw Reply e ID 3 My I Phone display has gone Click Add Advisory button The Add Advisory page opens Specify the advisory in the given text box If you wish to display the advisory in the request view page then select the option by enabling the check box By default the check box will be selected If you do not want to display the advisory in the request view page then de select the check box 4
299. patrick arcam com ARCAM corporation Open Jun 2 2009 05 48 AM Jun 2 2009 G amp My I Phone Display has gone Michella John michella acme com ACME Inc Open Jun 2 2009 05 48 AM Jun 2 2009 Incoming Call D Call from Pau Graham Energy Corporation 9659262500 den Regiests View Details Lea Request e View Requests Track all the pending overdue and completed requests on viewing the request history of the caller e View Details View entire details of the contact e Log Request Log in requests instantly while on call If the caller is an unknown contact then u can either log contact number along with the following links appears e Log as Contact You can log in the unknown contact into SupportCenter Plus e Log Request Log in requests instantly while on call ZOHO Corporation 223 Helpdesk Customizer With Helpdesk Customizer you can customize the entire request form to suit your organizations needs From setting values to category status priority level to setting mandatory fields before closing requests Helpdesk Customizer provides it all e Category e Status e Level e Mode e Priority e Request Additional Fields e Request Field Permissions e Request Closing Rules ZOHO Corporation 224 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Category Sub Category I tems You can classify the requests into different categories sub categories and Items Say requests for inst
300. phon D Maintenan Restart online demo 4 New Tasks Creating New Tasks 5 New Events Creating New Events 6 Bulk Operations Delete Delete bulk tasks and events from the list view ZOHO Corporation 46 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Activities based on Filters Through the pre defined filters in the Activities Tab you can have a quick and consolidated view of the tasks and events configured in the application The of the pre defined filters are as shown below vi Views Tasks Tasks Today Pending Tasks Overdue Tasks Completed Tasks All Tasks My Tasks Events All Events Events Today Upcoming Events My Events e Tasks Today Lists all the tasks assigned to the logged in support rep that is due on that day e Pending Tasks Lists all the unfinished and incomplete tasks assigned to the logged in support rep e Overdue Tasks Lists all the tasks assigned to the logged in support rep that has exceeded the due date e Completed Tasks Lists all the tasks assigned to the logged in support rep which are completed and closed es All Tasks Lists all the tasks irrespective of status configured in the application e My Tasks Lists the tasks assigned to the logged in support rep irrespective of the status Events es All Events Lists all the events configured in the application e Events Today Lists all the events th
301. plus html 1 23 KB Edit Account You can also edit an account from the account details page 1 Click Edit Account button 2 The Edit Account page opens with the values populated while adding the account 3 Modify the details and click Update Delete Account To delete the account 1 Click on Delete Account button 2 A confirmation dialog appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The account is removed from the list Note EN If any requests are raised for the account then the account cannot be deleted Recent Requests You can view the recently raised account s requests This helps you to understand the kind of requests received from the account A total of five requests can be viewed in the Account Details page To view the remaining requests click View All Requests link You can also add a request from this page Click Add Request link An Add Request form pops up Enter the Contact Name The contact name is mandatory field The account for which the request is raised is specified in a non editable field If the contact details are available in the application the E mail Phone Mobile fields are automatically populated Pon ZOHO Corporation 180 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Specify the Request Title This field is also mandatory Enter the Description of the request in the field provided Click Save If you need to add more details for the request click Add more Detail
302. quests with priority as a parameter SLA Resolution Time compliance by Category The number of requests within the specified SLA resolution time and the number of overdue requests with category as a parameter SLA Response Time compliance by Support Rep The number of requests within the specified SLA response time and the number of overdue requests assigned to the support reps SLA Response Time compliance by Level The number of requests within the specified SLA response time and the number of overdue requests with level as a parameter SLA Response Time compliance by Priority The number of requests within the specified SLA response time and the number of overdue requests with priority as a parameter SLA Response Time compliance by Category The number of requests within the specified SLA response time and the number of overdue requests with category as a parameter Request Summary Lists the number of requests that are overdue the number of requests due for that day and the number of unresolved requests Inbound Due Completed Requests Line graph showing the inbound overdue and completed requests Requests By Mode Pie chart depicting the number of requests in the various modes configured in the application Requests By Support Rep Pie chart depicting the number of requests assigned to the support reps Requests By Level Pie chart depicting the number of requests in the levels configured in the application Requests
303. r 5 Specify your Proxy Authentication details such as the proxy username and password 6 Type in a keyword to follow all the tweets related to the keyword say the keyword is acmePhone You can add upto 5 keywords and the specified keyword opens as a tab in Tweet Updates under the Request module 7 Click Save Twitter Account Details Twitter Username jak_thomas Don t have a Twitter Account Twitter Password eeccceeece j Sign up with Twitter v Proxy Settings CH No Proxy Specify Proxy Server Settings Proxy Host 192 113 4 64 Proxy Port 8080 Authentication User Name jake thomas Password TTITO Search Keywords Enter Search Keyword Add ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus Acme Printers Acme Save Cancel ZOHO Corporation 218 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Tweet Updates and Creating New Requests You can view the Tweet Updates in the request list view page 1 Click Request tab in the header pane 2 Click Tweet Updates tab The Direct Message Mentions History and the search keywords are listed as header links 3 Each tweet has options to send Direct Message Reply and Convert as Request 4 Clicking on Convert as Request opens the New Request form with the Name Twitter Screen Name Subject and Description as specified in the tweet Add and edit the appropriate changes and click Add Request ZOHO Corporation 219
304. r of contacts without an account Top Ten accounts with maximum number of products Pie chart depicting the top ten accounts with maximum number of products Top Ten accounts with maximum number of requests Pie chart depicting the top ten accounts with maximum number of requests Accounts By Time Zone Pie chart depicting the number of accounts under each time zone Accounts By I ndustry Pie chart depicting the number of accounts under each industry Top Ten contacts with maximum number of requests Pie chart depicting the top ten contacts with maximum number of requests Contact Pending Approvals Lists the number of contacts that have registered for SupportCenter Plus through the customer portal Registered Contacts and the number of contacts who have raised requests in the application but their data is unavailable in the database Unapproved Contacts Contract Widgets Contract Expiry Summary Lists the number of contracts that has expired in the last 30 days the number of contracts expiring in the next 7 days and the number of contracts expiring in the next 30 days Contract Creation Summary Lists the number of contracts created in the last 7 days the number of contracts created in the last 30 days and the number of contracts created in the last 3 months ZOHO Corporation 353 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Solution Widgets e Solutions waiting for approval Lists the recent five solu
305. ract form you have an option to list only the Account based products or All products by choosing the option from the drop down e Intelligent Response System While creating a new request contacts can view the available solutions solutions which they can view related to the request Thus the contacts can search for solutions instantly rather than conducting a separate search in the Solutions tab To avail this feature enable suggest solutions for Contacts check box e Conversation The mail transactions between the support rep handling the request and the contact are listed under Conversations in the request details page Conversations between two support reps or between a support rep and account manager can be made private i e these conversations will not be available to the contacts In short if the contact s email address is not specified in the To or CC field the conversation is moved to private Enable Make request conversations public or private check box to avail this option ZOHO Corporation 297 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Request Feature Settings Includes options to change the status of a request to Open when a contact replies to an Onhold request And actions to perform when a contact replies to a closed requests If you wish to change the status to Open when a contact replies to an Onhold request click Yes radio button Select the following options when a contact replies to a Closed req
306. reps in case of any application error e Organization Details e Settings e System Notification Settings e ei e Backup Scheduling SY ZOHO Corporation 295 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring Organization Details You can configure the details of your organization under Organization Details The Organization details appear while generating a report under the Reports module 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Organization Details icon i Organization Details form is displayed under Organization Settings block The 3 Enter the Basic Information of your organization such as the Name of your organization and a brief explanation of the organization s specializations in the Description field 4 Next enter the Address of your organization such as address city postal code state and country 5 Specify the Contact Information such as the E mail ID Phone No Faz No and your organization Web URL 6 You can also import the Company Logo and use that in places where the organization details are being used 1 Click Import Image button 2 Click the Browse button and choose the image file from the file chooser window and click Open 3 Click Import 7 Enable the check box beside Use this I mage to use this image where the organization details are being used 8 Click Save At a later time if you wi
307. request is split as a new request with consecutive request id 1 Due by time is not mentioned for the split request 2 Notes tasks conversation thread will not be available in the split request ZOHO Corporation 86 Assigning Requests to Support Rep All the unassigned requests raised in SupportCenter Plus can be assigned to Groups and Support Reps This increases the efficiency and turn around time of the support desk team Hence reducing the waiting period of the request as they are assigned and answered sooner by the support reps You can either pickup the request or assign it to support reps e Assigning request to Support Rep e Picking up request e Bulk assigning request e Unassigning requests Assigning request to Support Rep Each request is owned by a support rep who are responsible for handling the request until it is closed To assign a support rep 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be assigned a support rep 3 From the request details page click Assign drop down menu gt select Assign option The Assign Group and Support Rep page opens Assign Group and Support Rep Close Assign Group and Support Rep Assign this Request to a Group and or Support Rep Choose Group Warranty Group Choose Support Rep Jake Thomas Assign Cancel You can either assign the request to a Group or to
308. rify g Chat B Forums Reports for Analysis g Knowledge Zt Base Request oer R ZZ de Closed Feng Representatives Ke Respond to d A Contact with Solution ZOHO Corporation 61 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Automatic Conversion of Email into Ticket From the above mentioned modes email is the most common mode to raise requests into the application As soon as the contact sends an email SupportCenter Plus effectively fetches mails from the mail server at regular intervals and routes the requests to the respective Business Units based on the configured email ID Customers sends email requests Organization Mail Server copy of the emails Falls into the Other Mailbox Accounts Support Email Account ACME Support Email Account Received here Configure incoming email IDs Configure Incoming Email IDs in SupportCenter Plus Sg outed here for respective Business Units support acme it com gt Acme IT ACME Business Units support acme retail com gt Acme Retail support acme telecom com gt ACME Telecom w ACME IT ACME Retail ACME Telecom EI Si g Once the request is routed to the respective Business Unit SupportCenter Plus checks and applies the corresponding Business Rules for these requests Business rules are pre defined custom rules that help in automating requests to appropriate category groups or support reps Whether its placing the request to
309. rmation based on your survey questions This will give you an idea of the users perspective and help you in deciding about the corrective actions that need to be taken to make the support team more efficient and effective e Survey Results by Support Rep has the survey information grouped based on individual support reps Each of the survey questions will carry some value and based on this value the average value for the questions will be marked against the support reps These points will enable you to objectively measure the support reps efficiency and effectiveness from the users perspective and take any corrective measures if required ZOHO Corporation 336 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Account Reports These reports provide you with the summary of account details with several parameters such as Report by Product Product Zone Time Zone Report by Account City Report by Account Country and Report by Account Industry Using these reports you can track the number of request raised from each account and zone Request Timespent Reports These reports provide information on the support rep s time spent on requests and the cost per support rep based on the time spent You can group the report information based on Account Contact Product and Product Type of the request The time spent report by contact gives you an idea on the cost per contact and the number of request By default the support desk repor
310. rranged in descending order 2 My Reminder s DH O Attend the demoon Sep 11 2009 01 00 PM Sep 10 2005 03 00 PM Change Reminder status to Complete Incomplete Alternatively 1 Click on Reminders link 2 From My Reminders pop up select gt Show All link By default you can view All the reminders from this page 3 Select the check box beside the Reminder Summary for which you wish to change the state 4 Select the state from Change Reminder State To drop down list Select Complete 5 Click on Change button To indicate the change the task is striked off Deleting Reminders To delete a reminder 1 Click on Reminders link to open My Reminders pop up 2 Select Delete radio button beside the reminders you wish to delete The reminder is deleted from the list To delete bulk reminders Click on Reminders link From My Reminders pop up select gt Show All link By default you can view All the reminders from this page 3 Select the check box beside the Reminder Summary you wish to delete Click Delete button A confirmation message appears on delete operation appears 5 Click Ok to proceed The reminder is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 39 The advantage of moving the task to completed state instead of deleting is that you can revert the state of the task to Open and edit the attributes But once the task is deleted it is completely removed from the application and cannot be r
311. ry report has the survey information grouped based on the category Against each category the points gained by each of the survey questions is tabulated Depending on the kind of survey questions this report provides valuable information based on individual request categories e Survey Results by Department has the survey information grouped based on the department from which the requests originated The points for each question of the survey is mapped against the department name from where the request originated e Survey Results by Level has the survey information grouped based on the level of the requests The points for each question of the survey is mapped against the level of the request for which the survey was sent e Survey Results by Mode has the survey information grouped based on the mode of the requests The points for each question of the survey is mapped against the mode of the request for which the survey was sent This also gives you an idea on the mode of request that is most frequently used to create a new request e Survey Results by Priority has the survey information grouped based on the priority of the requests The points for each question of the survey is mapped against the priority of the request for which the survey was sent e Survey Results by Contact has the survey information grouped based on individual contact This helps you in finding out which contact has sent the maximum number of requests and any other info
312. s On Hold Overdue Requests Requests Due Today Pending Requests Completed Requests All Requests High Priority My View Low Priority ZOHO Corporation 70 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Manage Custom Views You can view all your customized view under Manage Custom Views From this page you can add edit and delete a custom view 1 Click on Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click Manage Custom View icon The Custom View page opens listing all the created custom views e indicates the custom view is public and can be viewed by all users e T indicates the custom view is private and can be viewed only by the creator of the custom view Requests gt Custom Views Custom Views New Custom View Delete O Filter Name Created By O amp SF High Priority administrator oO SS SS I views administrator oOo g WB My view administrator 1 1 1f you are the administrator then you can view all your customized private and public views 2 2 If you are a support rep then you can add only private custom views Edit Custom Views To edit a custom view 1 Click the edit icon beside the filter name you wish to edit 2 From Edit Custom View page edit the details 3 Click Save You can also add a new custom view by clicking Save and Add New button Delete Custom Views To delete custom views 1 Select the check
313. s link The page navigates to add new request under Request module fo Ont Recent Requests View All Requests Add request ID Subject Contact Assigned To Due By Status Date 8 Unable to restore the backup d George Mallroy Shawn Adams Apr 30 2010 12 36 PM Open Apr 22 2010 12 35 PM 7 Unable to restore the backup d George Mallroy Shawn Adams Apr 28 2010 12 36 PM Open Apr 22 2010 12 35 PM 6 Replace battery request Andrew Howard Stern Apr 29 2010 12 32 PM Open Apr 22 2010 12 20 PM 1 Printer Problem Andrew Jeniffer Doe Apr 1 2010 02 53PM Onhold Mar 31 2010 12 51 PM 3 Server Crash George Mallroy Heather Graham Mar 31 2010 03 07 PM Open Mar 30 2010 02 12 PM Sub Accounts You can add any number of Sub Accounts to the Account Say if HP in U S is the Account then its branches in Germany Spain India Canada Japan Singapore can be taken as Sub Account In addition you can also associate contacts to the sub account Thus keeping a track of all the sub account information Sub Accounts Add Sub Account Sub Account Name Phone Email Time Zone S Acme Corporations Amsterdam 1 925 924 9400 info acme com GMT 01 00 Amsterdam DS Acme Corporations London 1 925 924 9400 info acme com GMT London Adding New Sub Account 1 Click on Add Sub Account button The New Sub Account form opens with the account name in non editable text Specify the Sub Account name The name is a mandatory field E
314. s not working Created On Sep 28 2009 04 35 PM Add Notes Add Task 7 Sharon Harper ZOHO Corporations amp Services Add Reminder Contact AdventNet C 925 852 2588 D 925 852 2592 7 Send Invite Request Account Info Time Entry History gt gt gt gt Merge Request gt gt d Canned Responses gt Manage Canned Responses gt Add New Canned Response Solutions Resolution gt Enter Resolution gt Search Solutions dn Approve gt Submit For Approval Others gt gt View Contact Details View Requests by Contact Cl Add Time Entry Save Save and Add To Solutions Save And Close Cancel 5 You can also search for solutions that might help you resolve the issue described in the request using Search Solution link To know more refer Search Solutions 6 You can also add the Time Spent Entry for the request by enabling Add Time Entry check box To know more on adding a Time Entry refer Time Entry 7 Save the resolution You can see the resolution getting displayed in this page else click Save and Close button 8 If you wish to add the resolution to the solutions database then click Save and Add to Solutions ZOHO Corporation 106 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide 1 The page navigates to the New Solution form where the Subject and Content fields are populated automatically You can Attach releva
315. s or Closed While creating a status you can also choose to stop the request timer for the status that is being created Depending on the need of your organization you can create various such status which will be listed in the status drop down menu in the New Request form 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Click on HelpDesk Customizer icon Zei under HelpDesk Settings Click Status from the left menu The Status List page is displayed You can add edit or delete the request status Add Status 1 Click the Add New Status link Enter the name of the status in the Name field 3 Select the Type to which the status belongs The status type allows you to identify whether the status that you are adding is still in progress and hence should be a part of the open requests or should be moved to the closed requests 4 If the added status requires the timer of the request to be stopped then you need to set the check box Stop timer 5 If you wish you can enter the status Description 6 Click Save N Edit Status 1 Click the Edit icon beside the status name you wish to edit In the Edit Status form you can modify the name of the status 3 If the status belongs to the In Progress type then you can choose to stop or start timer If the request status belongs to the completed type then you cannot edit the type of the request status 4 If you wish you can edit the Descripti
316. se purchased If you have purchased a 5 Business Unit license then only 5 business units can be added along with the default Business Unit present in the application Edit Business Unit 1 From the list of Active Business Units click the Edit icon beside the Business Unit you wish to edit 2 Modify the required fields and click Update ZOHO Corporation 18 Archive Business Units ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Business Units cannot be deleted but can be made inactive by moving it to archive for further reference The business unit currently viewed cannot be moved to archive state unless you switch to another business unit To move a Business Unit to archive 1 From the list of Active Business Unit select the Archive Business Unit icon ey beside the Business Unit you wish to move to archive state 2 A success message appears and the business unit is moved under Archive Business Unit Note Business Units moved to archive will not take up a license To reactive archive Business Units 1 Select Archive Business Unit link The list of all archive business unit is displayed 2 Click Reactivate Business Unit icon beside the business unit you wish to make active Business Unit Settings The Business Unit Settings consists of all the admin settings that require separate configurations for each Business Units To know more on configuring individual settings refer Configurations ManageEngine
317. sed on Request I D If you are aware of the request ID of the request you are searching for then you can perform the search using the request ID alone It is quick and displays the request instantly Refresh this page Never v Set Go to Request ID Column wise search of requests You can also perform column wise search of requests if you know any of the request detail such as subject requester s name and so on To perform a column wise search 1 From the request list view page click on Search icon 4 The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 2 Enter the search string in the column of your choice 3 Click Go The search results matching the search string s are displayed re Tee A 1 f 56 aaan B i New Request Edit Delete Close Merge Assign to e i 1 25 0f 45 bi HN 125 perpage wi o Subject Status Dueby Time Assigned To Contact Name QE replace battery request open l Sharon reel og D H y Closed Sep 11 2009 11 00 AM Jake Thomas Radhika op g D restore th Open Sep 17 2009 03 06 PM Ruth Hinks Sharon Harper 0g DI problem with the software Open Sep 11 2009 11 00 AM George Mallory Radhika og DI AC not working properly Open Sep 14 2009 01 26 PM Henry William Radhika o g 2 Replace battery request Open Sep 17 2009 03 21 PM Jake Thomas Sharon Harper 0g e eve crashes Open Sep 16 2009 04 25 M administrator Sharon Harper
318. sh to edit the information that you entered now you can do so by following the same procedure explained above ZOHO Corporation 296 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Configuring General Settings You can set the default language currency date and time to be displayed in the application enable Business Units and Active Directory Authentication for Support Reps provided an Alias URL and URL Redirection Mark request conversations as public private and much more in General Settings To access the General Settings configuration page 1 Click the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on the Settings icon u Organization Settings Language Currency Date and Time Settings e Display Language Select the language in which the application should be displayed from the drop down Say Chinese Dutch The browser default language is English e Currency Specify the default currency of the SupportCenter Plus in the given text field This unit will be used in all the places where cost calculation is done Default currency specified in SupportCenter Plus is e Date and Time Format You can set the default format for data and time from the respective drop down The selected data and time format is displayed wherever the date and time is required in SupportCenter Plus application Request Settings e Product Display While selecting a product in the new request form or cont
319. signed with a new request ID that uniquely identifies them The rest of the information such as the Subject Description and the request parameters is retained as it is Note 1 Any Notes Tasks or Conversation thread added in the original request will EN not be present in the duplicated request 2 The Created Date and Due by Date is different from that of the original request 3 You can edit the content to specify only necessary information and assign the request to appropriate support reps ZOHO Corporation 101 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Printing Requests You can print and preview the entire request content using Print Preview option To print a request 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be printed 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Print Preview option The pop up of the request in printable format opens The page displays request details resolution and request history of the request 4 Click Ctrl p to print the request ZOHO Corporation 102 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Canned Responses Canned Response are pre defined email notification for frequent replies with which the support reps can reply to emails with ease Other than customized template for individual mails refer notification rules canned re
320. sing the Search Solutions link Time Entry Details You can view the Time Spent details for the request under this block You are also provided with an option to Add Time Entry for the request 1 Click on the Add Time Entry button to open the Add Time Entry page 2 The Subject and Contract details is displayed at the top of the page 3 By default the support rep assigned to the request is displayed in Support Rep drop down box If required you can choose the support rep from the drop down list This field is mandatory 4 Select the Time Entry Type Say If the support rep has provided necessary information on the product to the requester then the support rep can specify the Time Entry Type as Product Consulting You have an option to also Add New Time Entry Type Add Time Entry Subject Re E Contract Covered Maintenance Contractrenewed Support Type Incident Based A Support Plan Gold Cost per Incident 2 00 Support Rep Jake Thomas v Time Entry Type Service amp Maintenance Add New Type Executed Time 28 Sep 2009 17 25 38 Ee Time Taken To Resolve EN Hours 0 Minutes Additional Cost 14 00 Total Cost 4 00 Description Save Cancel 5 Select the date and time when the request was Executed using the calender icon This field is mandatory Specify the total Time Taken to Resolve the request in Hours and Minutes If there are any Additional Cost then the same can be provided in the field The Tot
321. sk The Title is a mandatory field 5 If the task is associated to a request account contact or contract then select the same from the Associate to drop down Also you can associated it to a specific ZOHO Corporation 50 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide request account contact or contract using the search icon Note If you are adding the task from the Request Account Contact or Contract details page then the Associate to option is selected automatically Start Time from the drop down 7 Select the Due Date of the task from the calendar icon 27 Also select the Due Time from the drop down 8 For repetitive tasks select the duration as daily weekly monthly or yearly from Repeat Task drop down Select the interval within which the task should be repeated from the Repeat Every drop down If the event has an end date select the date using the calendar icon 27 Else enter the number of times after which the event ends in the text field 9 If the task is non repetitive select Never from Repeat Every drop down 10 To assign the task select the support rep from Assign to drop down Next select the Priority and Status of the task from the respective drop down 11 Enter the content of the task in the Description field 12 You can be reminded of the task by selecting the number of days hours from Remind me before drop down You will be reminded of the task based on the sc
322. sponse can be sent to the frequently raised requests It reduces the response time and also provides a personal touch to the request The response can be made private or public according to your convenience You can add manage and share a canned response Manage Canned Response Manage Canned Response gives the list view of all the available canned response along with its template name and access ability From the this page you can add edit and delete the canned response 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of a request 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Manage Canned Responses option under Canned Responses block The page opens to view the list of available canned response From this page you can add edit and delete a canned response Add New Canned Response To add a new canned response 1 Click on Add New Canned Response link available on the right hand side of the page The New Canned Response page opens Note 1 You can also add a New Canned Response from Add New drop down link CA EN 2 Alternatively you can also add a new canned response from Actions drop down menu gt Add New Canned Response option 2 Specify a unique Name for the canned response This field is mandatory 3 Enter a brief Description of the canned response in the field provided 4 You can customize the Subject and Message con
323. ss Units lists all the Business Units added in SupportCenter Plus from which you can add edit and move Business Units to archive state In addition you can also set a Business Unit as default The default Business Unit accumulates requests which are not aliased to any business unit Business Units elp Preferences administrator Log out ManageEngine 5 SupportCenter General v 6 Jul 2009 12 10 34 Switch to Home Requests Solu Reports Support OpManager Manage Business Units ServiceDesk Plus General Active Business Units T Brenived Business UMIE Add Business unit Business Unit Created On Created By Py IS o General Jul 2 2009 02 54 PM System amp OpManager Jul 6 2009 12 05 PM administrator A amp ServiceDesk Plus Jul 6 200912 02 PM administrator Add Business Unit 1 2 3 4 5 Click on Add Business Unit link Specify the name of the Business Unit The name is a mandatory field Select the Time Zone of the specified Business Unit Enter a brief description on the Business Unit in Description field If you wish to make this Business Unit available in Customer Portal then enable the check box Make it available in the Customer Portal Click Add Business Unit to add the business unit and return to the list view page If you do not wish to add the Business Unit then click Cancel gt Note The number of Business Units added depends on the licen
324. ssion that can be enabled under Roles 2 If two different support reps had been assigned to the requests before the merging process then the support rep assigned to the parent request is the owner of the merged request 3 The due by time for the merged request is similar to the due by time of the parent request 4 All the notes and conversation thread for the child request is merged with the parent requests SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to merge requests from the Request List View or from the Request Details Page Merge Request from List View You can merge two or more requests from the list view While merging requests from the list view the oldest request becomes the parent and the other requests become the child To merge requests Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page Select the list of requests to be merged by enabling the check box Click Merge button A confirmation dialog appears Click Ok to proceed The selected requests are merged Pw NE al requests E Search New Request Edit Delete Close Local Assign to 7 Subject Contact Name Assigned To Cannot restore backup data Sharon Harper Jake Thomas Replace battery request Sharon Harper John Roberts System Crashed Sharon Harper Jake Thomas Lal O Error while performing a backu Mark Adams Jake Thomas In the above image the oldest request Request ID 6 is the Parent request whil
325. st CE No reply is sent nor received for the request Ba Reply generated by the system ER A reply has been sent by the support rep to the contact 4 A reply has been sent by the contact E The mail has been forwarded to a support rep wil Resolution time for the request is overdue First Response time is overdue bk Both Response time and Resolution time are overdue edit individual requests a Search for requests on entering the request id subject requesters name and so on R select the columns to be displayed in the list view ZOHO Corporation 64 From the request list view page you can 1 Refresh this page Set the time frame to refresh the page from every minute to 30 minutes On setting the refresh time in the application the page gets refreshed automatically for the specified time frame By default the value is set to Never To auto refresh list view page 1 Click the edit icon beside the value Never 2 From the drop down list select the frequency of refreshing the page 3 Click Set button Never G Every 1 Minute Every 2 Minutes Every 5 Minutes 25 per page iv Every 10 Minutes Every 15 Minutes Date Every 20 Minutes Every 30 Minutes Refresh this page Never v Go to Request ID 3 Set the number of requests per page and navigation buttons You can set the number of requests to be displayed in the request list view page Goto RequestID
326. st 0 00 Active Period Thu 11 Nov 2010 Sat 11 Dec 2010 Incidents Used 0 Incidents Incidents Remaining 0 Incidents Services Covered Maintenance Service Support Product Description Maintenance Contract for the account Acme Attachments maintenance contract txt If you have enabled notifications to be sent to users before the contract expires then the Notification block appears The contract expiry notification can be customized in Admin gt Notification Rules gt Contract sub tab Adding Tasks The Tasks associated to the account are listed under the Task block Click the Title link of the task to view the task details The page redirects to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations You also have an option to add new tasks from this page Refer Add New Task to know more Adding Events The Events associated to the account are listed under the Events block Click the Title link of the event to view the event details The page redirects to the Activities tab from where you can perform edit and delete operations You also have an option to add new event from this page Refer Add New Event to know more ZOHO Corporation 161 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Editing and Deleting Contracts ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus provides you with the option to modify and delete the existing contracts provided you have the corresponding access permission
327. stomer portal ZOHO Corporation 262 Portal Color Customization Customize the header content area sidebar and body background with portal color font and size according to your choice To restore to the default color scheme select Restore Default Color Scheme link To preview the customer portal while customizing click Preview Click Apply Changes to apply the changes made Note Customer Portal Page can be accessed at EN http lt server_name gt lt port gt sd SolutionsHome sd ZOHO Corporation 263 Contract Settings Contract Settings provides you to configure the parameters required while adding contracts You can configure support service support plans service level agreement operational hours and holidays of your organization business units The Contract Settings consists of the following configurations e Support services Service Level Agreement 4 e Support Plans N e Operational Hours tae SI Fro e Holidays t ZOHO Corporation 264 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Support Services The services offered to an account is listed under Support Services These services are grouped as Support Plan which determines the due by time for a request To access the Support Services page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click Support Services icon SS under Contract Settings The Support Serv
328. t column information Both are mandatory fields 2 Select the Top column information to be displayed in the report Select the Left column information to be displayed in the report You can Summarize the columns by Count Average Minimum or Maximum value Of the Request ID or the Elapse Time Advanced Grouping 1 Click the Advanced tab In Advance Matrix Report you have Column Grouping and Group by options Both are mandatory Select the Columns and Date format from the drop down You can group the matrix in tree levels by selecting the respective levels under Group By column 4 You can Summarize the columns by Count Average Minimum or Maximum value Of the Request ID or the Elapse Time Step 2 Filter Options On selecting the columns to be displayed in the reports you need to specify the Filter Options for the columns Click the Filter Options title Specify the Date Filter by selecting the Column Day and Date If you wish to add Advanced Filtering select the Column Name and Criteria from the drop down list Specify the value by clicking on pick value icon K You can add n number of Name and Criteria and match with AND or OR condition Click Run Report gt gt button On running the report you get a Matrix report for the selected column data 5 Save the Report ZOHO Corporation 340 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Viewing Reports While viewing a custom report whether its Ta
329. t manager details are recorded and update periodically Thus giving you a complete picture of the account and its details Adding New Account The new account form can be accessed by two ways in SupportCenter Plus application a Add New drop down b Accounts tab Add New drop down The Add New drop down is a quick navigator to instantly access the New Accounts form the home page are x Ek Log a Call ae o I o fo T Request Reminder Task Event Canned Response Solution Contract Account Contact eB es el o MR s To configure the New Account form go to Step 3 in Accounts tab Accounts Tab 1 Click the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the account list view page Click on New Account button 3 From the New Accounts form specify the name of the Account in the Account Name field This is a mandatory field 4 Specify the Annual Revenue for the support service from the account 5 Specify the details such as Email Phone Website and Fax of the account Det ZOHO Corporation 177 6 9 10 11 12 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Select the Type of Industry and Time Zone of the account from the drop down list Select the Account Manager of the account from the drop down list To know more on account manager refer Account Manager Specify the Domain Names for the account The domain name is essential when c
330. t option to import all relevant information from your existing database Wan e Import from Outlook 3G Schedule the CSV import The Outlook edition can be installed as a Plugin on MS Outlook which can be used to synchronize the contacts between MS Outlook and SupportCenter Plus organization s customer database SupportCenter Plus also provides a CS V based option to keep it s database in synch with your Importing from Outlook The SupportCenter Plus Outlook edition is productivity enhancement software that can be used with SupportCenter Plus system and Microsoft Outlook The Outlook edition can be installed on user s MS Outlook as a plugin which can be used to synchronize the contacts in between Microsoft Outlook and the SupportCenter Plus To know more refer Import from Outlook Importing from CSV amp Scheduling CSV Import The easy to use CSV import option quickly imports all the relevant information from the existing database and also provides an option to keep the database in sync with the organization s customer database ZOHO Corporation 166 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Accounts List View On clicking the Accounts tab the page redirects you to the Accounts List View page where you can maintain and organize all the accounts created in SupportCenter Plus You have the facility to e Customize the page to display the accounts e Option to view accounts based on filters e Import
331. t the sales details in CSV format into SupportCenter Plus To import sales details from CSV file 1 Click the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Click Import Sales details from CSV link Reminders 21 Oct 2009 16 14 Admin Reports Support Step 1 Upload CSV file Click on Browse button to select the CSV file On locating the CSV file from the file chooser window click Open Select the File Encoding from the drop down Click Next gt gt button ee E Step 2 Map Columns 1 Map the application sales field with the field names from the CSV file 2 Click Next gt gt Click Previous lt lt to go back to Step 1 Step 3 Import 1 Click Import Now button The sales detail values from the CSV file is imported 2 Once the import is complete the data on how many records were added how many overwritten and how many failed to import is displayed in the pop up 3 If at any point you wish to stop importing from the CSV file click the Exit button ZOHO Corporation 189 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Importing Accounts Contacts from CSV File Adding each and every account along with the contact information is endless and is even more tedious to keep the information in sync with the organization s customer database SupportCenter Plus provides an easy to use CSV import option to import all relevant account and contact information from your existin
332. t your needs Whether its permitting your customers to browse through solutions or announcements to customizing the entire portal color Customer Portal Settings provides it all With Customer Portal Settings under the Admin module you can transform the entire web portal page into a flexible and feasible customer portal Note Customer Portal Page can be accessed at EN http lt server_name gt lt port gt sd SolutionsHome sd There are three blocks which needs to be configured before you achieve your desirable customer portal e Portal Name The name to be displayed in your customer portal e Portal Content The contents that needs to be displayed in the portal which includes the header sidebar and the content area e Portal Color Customization You can customize the portal color font and size accordingly to your choice Portal Content The Portal Content block consists of the Header Content Area and Sidebar Sabheader e Header On the header you can display your company logo and specific URLs to the product or website Enable the check box beside Logo to display the company logo in the customer portal You can also add direct links to your company websites from the portal ZOHO Corporation 21 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Portal Content Header Content Area Sidebar a Logo V Links Link 1 alte 2 e Content Area Add links to instantly browse through sol
333. tCenter Plus application provides a facility to record solutions of the frequently common raised requests The recorded solutions function as a knowledge base of solutions Thus when you receive a request refer to the recorded solutions and solve it This reduces the turnaround time in attending to the requests generated by the contacts and closing the same All contacts and support reps who have permissions to view the solutions knowledge base can access this section of the application The SupportCenter Plus administrator can assign access privileges to the various support reps for the solutions section This access privilege can vary from just view only privilege to full control privilege For setting the access privileges to support reps refer to the Configuring Support Reps and Configuring Roles sections You can access the solutions even without logging into the application but will be able to view only those solutions that are published in the Self Service Portal These solutions have to be approved by the concern support reps The contacts can be restricted from viewing all the solutions in Self Service Portal using the Topics Template To access the knowledge base directly without having to login to the application type the URL provided below in the address bar of the browser http lt server name gt lt port number gt portal OR http lt server name gt lt port number gt sd SolutionsHome sd where the lt server name
334. tTimeEntryDetails status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getTimeEntryDetails status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found ZOHO Corporation 319 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getTimeEntryDetails is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getTimeEntryDetails gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name id value Request ID of the request to view read time entry gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt Close Request URL Format The URL format for the Request operation Close For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml closeRequest For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json closeRequest Parameters The parameter to be passed via HTTP method is Parameter Value Description id string Request ID of the request to be viewed Output Response Format The output response format for both xml
335. tact To configure the New Contracts form go to Step 3 in Contracts tab Contracts Tab Click Contracts tab in the header pane to open the Contract list view page Click New Contracts button From the New Contract form specify the Contract Name This field is mandatory Specify the Contract Number Si En us All the accounts configured in SupportCenter Plus are listed in Account Name drop down list from which you can select the account to associate this contract If the account name is not listed then you can add a new account by clicking Add New link beside account name field This field is also mandatory ZOHO Corporation 159 6 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus On selecting the account if there are any products associated to the account then the same is listed under Products drop down list If you are creating contracts for products then choose the product from the drop down Note Er 1 Only one service contract can be associated to a account product for a given time period 2 If an account does not have associated products then the product text field is not populated 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 Enter a brief Description about the contract Choose a Support Plan from the drop down list While configuring a support plan if you have specified the Support Type as Incident Based and filled in the values such as No of Incidents C
336. tart online demo 6 Search Search for Contacts either through alphabets or column wise search option Refer Searching Contacts Contacts gt All Contacts All Contacts Io Sharon Harper Search All A B New Contact Delete Reconcile Contacts F Name a Login Name Email IS Sharon Harper sharon sharon acme co 7 Creating New Contact Create New Contacts Refer Adding New Contact 8 Bulk Operations Deleting Delete bulk Contacts from the list view Refer Deleting Contact Associate Contacts to Accounts Associate bulk contacts to an account Refer Associate Contacts to Accounts 3 Reconcile Contacts Reconcile contacts who have multiple entries in SupportCenter Plus Refer Reconcile Contacts ZOHO Corporation 193 Contacts based on Filters You can view Contacts based on filters from the Contacts list view page In addition you can also create new filters using the Custom View option to place Contacts in specific groups There are some pre defined filters in SupportCenter Plus as shown ales MN Cle TEE IT TE ed ET d TIR Contacts Contacts gt Recently Added Contacts Recently Added Contacts w Views dp All Contacts Recently Added Contact All A B c D Contacts without Accou New Contact Delete gt Primary Contacts _New Contact gt Unapproved Contacts F Name amp A Registered Contacts O SS Kate Hinks C G Kurt Rusell e All Contacts Lists all
337. task The Title is a mandatory field ZOHO Corporation 32 10 11 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide If the task is associated to a request account contact or contract then select the same from the Associate to drop down Also you can associated it to a specific request account contact or contract using the search icon Note If you are adding the task from the Request Account Contact or Contract details page then the Associate to option is selected automatically Time from the drop down For repetitive tasks select the duration as daily weekly monthly or yearly from Repeat Task drop down Select the interval within which the task should be repeated from the Repeat Every drop down If the event has an end date select the date using the calendar icon l Else enter the number of times after which the event ends in the text field If the task is non repetitive select Never from Repeat Every drop down To assign the task select the support rep from Assign to drop down Next select the Priority and Status of the task from the respective drop down Enter the content of the task in the Description field You can be reminded of the task by selecting the number of days hours from Remind me before drop down You will be reminded of the task based on the schedule start time Click Add The task is added and listed with the already existing tasks in ascending order based on date and ti
338. tent by typing the text of your choice and also adding other variables that you wish to display as a part of the subject or message content 5 Click the corresponding variable from the list box beside the respective field to add variables ZOHO Corporation 103 New Canned Response Name Acknowledgement Description Acknowledgement reply sent to the contact Customize Subject and Message Choose Subject variables Subject Choose Option a e Request ID Her Request ID RequestId lt Title Created Date Due By Date Subject M Message a miro lay e ale Choose content variables Ft nr FSSBS2 EE RY ap Fe GF a Description a Dear ContactName Priority This is an acknowledgment mail for your request Your request has been created with poa id Requestid The subject of the request is STitle As this is an automated response Cateqo you need not reply to this mail Sub Caeni omg Please get back to us for any further clarifications GE regards Contact Mobile Support team A Contact Phone Contact Email S4 Allow all Support Reps to access this template Save Cancel 6 The response can be made either private or public accordingly to your convenience You can share the canned response with other support reps by enabling Allow all Support Reps to access this template check box 7 Click Save If you do not wish to add a canned response then click C
339. the mail and send it for review to the concern authority Enter the mail address of the concern authority to review the reply in the To field The responses that have been sent to the contact can be viewed as conversations in the request details view ZOHO Corporation 115 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Forwarding Requests to Support Reps If the support rep is unable to resolve a request and requires further assistance then the support rep has an option to forward the request to other support reps The conversation thread between the support reps are private and hence cannot be viewed by the contact To know more refer Request Conversations To forward a request 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the Request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be forwarded 3 From the request details page select Reply drop down menu gt Forward the Request option The Forward Request page pops up 4 The From address is pre populated with the Reply To mail address configured under Mail Configurations under Admin module 5 If the email address of the contact is specified in the application then the same is populated in the To field 6 You can also send the same information to more than one person by specifying the mail address in CC field 7 If you do not wish to disclose the recipient then specify the mail address in the BCC field 8 By default the Subject and
340. the most recently added accounts e Accounts Having Contracts Lists all the accounts associated to a contract e Accounts With SubAccounts Lists all the accounts with sub accounts ZOHO Corporation 170 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Custom Views You can create your own customized accounts list view page The accounts is sorted based on the filter criteria you specify while creating the custom view Thus helping you to sort and view the accounts based on your requirement e Create Custom View e Manage View Creating Custom View If you want to view all the accounts with similar Topics Template 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Click on Create Custom View icon The Add Custom View page opens Accounts gt All Accounts All Accounts v Views Account Views All Accounts A B C D E Recently Added Account All i New Account Delete Topics Accounts Having Contra Accounts With SubAccou E Account Name amp E Ef Acme Corporations 3 In the Add Custom View page specify a View Name like Topics Template This field is mandatory 4 If you are the administrator and want this custom view to be available only when you log in select the check box beside Make this view as private custom view The custom view is made private By default the custom view for an administrator is public If you are a support rep w
341. tion is available while creating a new request from both the support rep and contact login While the CC recipients added by the contact can be viewed and modified by the support rep the CC ed recipients specified by the support rep are concealed from the contact view Furthermore there are a set of five notification rules exclusively for the CC recipients Adding CC Recipient The CC recipient field is available in the new request form of the support rep login Enter the email address of the CC recipients to be notified If more than one email ID is specified use comma as a separator as shown in the image Cc Added Cc Recipients will get notified on this request actions jake acme com bill acme com mark acme com Enter Cc Recipients email addresses separated by commas The entered CC recipients will be notified of the conversation between the support rep and the contact via email Modifying the CC Recipient You can modify remove or add another email address to the CC recipient from the request details page Click the Edit button Perform the corresponding operations and click on Update Cc Recipients jake acme com bill thomas acme com sharon acme com r r Cc Recipients Update Cancel Enter Cc Recipients email addresses separated by commas CC Recipients Notifications The CC recipient notification are sent via email to the CC recipients There are five notification rules under the CC recipient notific
342. tion using Insert Solution link Select a Topic The corresponding solutions title under the topic is displayed Click Insert Solution link beside the specific topic The solution is added automatically as the message content Subject Re Request ID 11 replace the battery of Iphone Canned Responses 7 Insert Solution Select a Topic Select a Title ei Basketball related Queries Password reset for administrator e General logi e Golf related Queries Changing the battery of the Iphone ac Solution Replacement Queries e Support Queries e Transportation Queries e Warranty Queries 11 Click Attach File s to add files as attachments to the mail 12 Click Send to send the mail to the concern person ZOHO Corporation 114 13 You have an option to Save the request as draft The email saved as drafts can be viewed edited deleted and sent for review from the request details page as shown below Requests gt View request Send for review Delete Edit My Draft Actions v Reply v ID 79 Iphone display is not working Created On Sep 29 2009 04 04 PM ae Contact Sharon Harper Acme Corporations Priottys PE Due Date Sep 29 2009 05 04 PM 925 852 2588 P 925 852 2592 2 Send Invite Request Account Info Resolution Time Entry History 13 Click Save and Send the request for review if you wish to save
343. tions waiting to be approved Clicking on Show All takes you to the Approval Pending Solutions list view page e Recent Solutions Lists the recent five solutions added in the application Clicking on Show All takes you to the Recent Solutions list view page Other Widgets e Announcement Lists the recent five announcements from the selected Business Units Clicking on Show all takes you to the currently showing announcement list view page es All Tasks Lists the recent six tasks created in a Business Unit e Custom Widgets As the name suggests this widget can be customized to display any plain text video or any output that requires an html snippet ZOHO Corporation 354 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Dashboards There are many actions that can be performed on the widgets from the Dashboard tab The following topics are discussed under this section e Drag and Drop Widgets e Widget Settings e Custom Widget Drag and Drop Widgets With the drag and drop option you can place the widgets in the dashboard according to your preference The widgets most viewed or vital can be placed above all other widgets To perform a drag and drop of the widgets 1 Hover the cursor over the widget title section 2 Click and drag and widget to the desired location in the canvas NOTE Please note that the widgets should be placed within the dotted lines as shown in the image below Actions
344. top importing from the CSV file click the Exit button ZOHO Corporation 14 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Registering SupportCenter Plus Once your trial evaluation period is over you need to register the SupportCenter Plus application To purchase the application please contact sales adventnet com They will send you the registered license file Using this license file you can register the SupportCenter Plus application To register SupportCenter Plus 1 Log in to the SupportCenter Plus application using the user name and password of an admin user 2 Click the License link available at the right top of the application The License window is opened as shown Renew Close ManageEngine plus SupportCenter CUSTOMER SUPPORT SOFTWARE Renew To renew AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus locate the license file sent to you and click Apply button License File Browse Apply Product Name AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus 7 0 0 License Type Trial Version Max Number of Support Rep Logins 2 Max Number of Accounts Unlimited Expires on Sat 17 Jan 2009 Expires in 29 days Contact AdventNet ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus support Email support supportcenterplus com Toll free 1 888 720 9500 3 Click the Browse button to locate the license file sent to you when you purchased the application 4 From the file chooser window select the
345. tract list view page The custom view marked as private is listed under My Views and the public custom view is displayed along with the predefined filters vw Views Contract Views All Open Contracts All Expired Contracts Created in the last 7 Created in the last 30 Created in the last 3 gt Expired in the last 30 Expiring in next 7 day gt Expiring in next 30 da Expiring in next 3 mon Account Manager Filter My Views gt Contracts based on Sup Manage Custom Views You can view all your customized view under Manage Custom Views From this page you can add edit and delete a custom view 1 Click on Contracts tab in the header pane to open the Contract list view page 2 Click Manage Custom View icon The Custom View page opens listing all the created custom views indicates the custom view is public and can be viewed by all users e M indicates the custom view is private and can be viewed only by the creator of the custom view ZOHO Corporation 155 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Contracts gt Custom Views Custom Views New Custom View Delete EI Filter Name Created By IS S Account Manager Filter administrator TI SS Contracts based on Support Plan administrator 1 1f you are the administrator then you can view all your customized private and public views 2 If you are a support rep then you can
346. ts is created for the current week On editing you can choose any custom period of your choice or choose to create reports for last week or this month or for just this day All these reports can be used for analysis purposes Say the reports mapped against the parameter support rep can be used to measure the support rep responsiveness and load handling capability Reports by Overdue requests You can get the report of all the overdue requests from Account Category Contact level Priority Group Contact Product Type Support Rep Mode Due Date and Created date Thus these reports helps in improving the service and rectify the mistakes for mutual benefit Reports by completed requests These reports show the distribution of completed and closed requests Similar to Survey Reports these reports are generated based on various parameters such as Category Account Contact Level Mode Priority Group Product and Product Type Reports by pending requests This shows the distribution of all pending requests for a specific period of time based on different parameters such as Category Account Contact Level Mode Priority Group Product Product Type and Support Rep Reports by all requests These reports provide you with graphical view of all open and closed requests by Category Created Date Account Level Priority Status Group Product Product Type Contact Support Rep request status by Category Level Priority Support R
347. tus Failure statuscode failurecode ZOHO Corporation 309 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Response response uri api xml addRequest status Failure statuscode 4000 statusmessage The parameter apikey is not available in the request Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation addRequest is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml addRequest gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter API Key gt lt input type hidden name email value Email ID of contact gt lt input type hidden name subject value Subject of the request gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt View Read Request URL Format The URL format for the Request operation View Read For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getRequest For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getRequest Parameters The parameters that needs to be passed via HTTP method for viewing a request are as follows Parameter Value Description id string Request ID of the request search string View requests based on keyword search email string Email address of the contact ZOHO Corporation 310 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide
348. u can add addition information which includes technical information based on your observations or information to support reps for a particular request using the Add Notes option You can also add notes to update the status of the request Notes can be added either from the request list view or from the request details page To add notes from the request list view refer Request List View 1 Click on the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject of the request to which you would like to add a note 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Add Notes option The Add Note window pops up displaying the Request Id Request ID 46 unable to reach the customer will call him tomorrow L Show this notes to Contact also E mail the support rep for notes addition Add Note 5 Enter the content in the text box as show above The note added can be made public or private e Public Notes Public notes can be viewed by the contact and support reps e Private Notes Private notes can be viewed only by the Support reps 7 By default the notes are private but can be made public on selecting Show this notes to Contact also check box 8 You can also notify the support rep assigned to the request about the addition of note on selecting E mail the support rep for notes addition check box 9 Click Add Note button The note is added at the bottom
349. uest gt lt input type submit name submit value Get gt lt form gt Say the email ID specified is jake acme com and the status as Open So all the requests by the contact Jake with the status as Open is displayed as the output in xml or json ZOHO Corporation 312 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide View Read Request Description This operation displays the Request Description alone by specifying the request ID or by conducting a search using keywords URL Format The URL format for the Request operation View Read Request Description For xml output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getRequestDescription For json output http lt server name gt lt port number gt api json getRequestDescri Parameters Either of the following parameters should be passed via HTTP method Parameter Value Description id string Request ID of the request to be viewed htmiDescription True False Displays output as html or plain text format If True the output is displayed as html format If False the output is displayed as a plain text Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters s response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure
350. uest the request is reopened always if the contact replies within the specified number of days from the closed time the request is reopened Else the reply is created as a new request the reply is appended as a conversation and notified to the support rep The status of the request remains unchanged the reply is created as a new request User Addition and Import Settings Contact auto addition configuration If a request fetched into the application is from an unknown contact contact details are unavailable in the database then you have options e Do not log the request This option will not log any of the new request details e Log the request but add the contacts after approval This option will log the request details but the contact information is added after approval from the concern personnel These contacts will be listed under Unapproved contacts e Log the request and add the contact without approval This option will log the request and add the contact details to the server automatically without any formal approval es Also create self service login account If you have selected the latter option you can create a Self service Login account to the contact Select any one of the available options as per your need Auto assign a contact to an account Requests raised by contacts whose information is unavailable in SupportCenter Plus application can be assigned to the account with the specified domain name automatically Sa
351. uest timer under Admin gt Helpdesk EN Customizer gt Status 2 You can also change the status of a request to On Hold Open by performing Inline edit or Edit operation 3 You cannot stop and start timer for requests that are overdue Stop Request Timer To stop the request timer for a request 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click the Subject link of the request to be moved to On Hold status 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Stop Timer option The Add Reason pop up window opens Add Reason for stopping timer Close Request ID 54 lack of necessary information and resources 5 Enter the relevant reason for stopping the timer in the given text field 6 Click Add The request is moved to On Hold status The reason for stopping the timer is appended to the request history ZOHO Corporation 97 Start Request Timer To restart the request timer for a request 1 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt Start Timer option The Add Reason for start timer pop up window opens 2 Enter the relevant reason to stop the timer in the given text field 3 Click Add The request is moved to Open Status The reason for starting the request timer is appended to the request history ZOHO Corporation 98 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Adding Notes Yo
352. uest to view the notes Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 Sample Response response uri api xml getRequestNotes status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 317 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getRequestNotes status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found Sample Input Form Sample form for the operation getRequestNotes is given below lt form method POST action http s lt server name gt lt port number gt api xml getRequestNotes gt lt input type hidden name apikey value SupportCenter
353. uests in bulk from the request list view page 1 Select the requests to be closed by enabling the check box in the request list view page 2 Click on Close button The selected requests are closed Close without Notification You also have an option to close the request without sending the survey form to the contact even though Enable Survey option is enabled Say On closing a request and sending a survey form to the contact via email if the contact has enabled auto reply system then a reply mail is generated and sent to SupportCenter Plus This reply mail in turn opens the closed request automatically Similar process continues even on closing this request To stop this chain process you can choose to close a request without sending a notification to contact To close without notification 1 From the request list view page click on the Subject link of the request to be closed 2 Click on Close drop down menu gt select Close without Notification option Even if you have survey the survey form will not be sent to the contact ZOHO Corporation 83 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Merging Requests You can merge two or more requests if the requests are related to each other say two requests are raised from a single contact regarding a similar product These two requests can be merged as one and a Support rep can be assigned to this merged request 1 The merge operation requires special permi
354. ules you can set the mandatory fields to be filled in by the support rep while closing a request In addition you also have options for users to close re open the resolved request from the application or from the link provided via email and to automate the request closing process Say you have selected Resolution as the mandatory field So on resolving the request support reps should enter the reason and solution for the request in the resolution field else an error pops up Stating to enter the details in the resolution field To access the Request Closing Rules configuration page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page Click on Helpdesk Customizer icon Ze under Helpdesk Settings Click on Request Closing Rules link from the menu on the left hand side of the page Setting Mandatory fields and Auto Close Request Settings 1 Enable the check box beside the mandatory fields for closing the request 2 Enabling Allow contacts to Close Re open the Resolved requests check box allows the contact to close re open the request either from the link provided via email or from contact login when the support rep moves the state of the request to Resolved 3 You can also Automate the request closing process Enable If the contact takes no action within the specified number of days check box and select the number of days after which the resolved request should get closed automatically e An email is s
355. unt from the accounts details page On associating the products with the account support rep handling the account will be aware of the product list under the account with its price warranty period and date of sale 1 2 3 9 Click Associate Product button to open the Associate Product page The account name is displayed in non editable text Select the Product Name from the drop down The product name is a mandatory field On selecting the product if the Unit Price for the product is mentioned then the price is populated in the respective field Select the Date of Sale from the calender icon 41 Select the Warranty Period for the product in years and months from the drop down Specify the No of Units The Net Price for the product is calculated based on the Unit Price and the No of Units mentioned If there are any Discounts or Tax Rate for the product then the same can be specified in the respective fields The Net Price will be calculated accordingly You can also enter a note regarding the product in the Comments field 10 Save the details The associated product gets displayed under the Products block Add Contracts If required you also have an option to add contracts to the account product from the accounts details page The complete details of the contract along with active period support plan and status can be viewed 1 2 3 Click Add Contract button to open the New Contract
356. upport reps contacts and accounts The addition fields configured are available while adding support reps accounts and contacts for all the business units in the application The Roles and Support Reps functionality under Global Settings is an added advantage to the multi tendency support especially in scenarios where a Support rep or a role is required for all the available business units To know more on configuring individual settings refer Configurations ManageEngine Business Units Siseblet d Preferences administrator SupportCenter General v A Reminders 30 Ape 20 Home Requests Solutions Contracts Accounts Contacts Admin Reports Support Manage Business Units Business Unit Settings Global Settings List View Organization Settings si ZS Gly D e Organization Mail Server Telephony Server Customer Portal Windows Domains Twitter Settings Details Settings Settings Settings Application Settings E i a Settings Default System Notification Backup Scheduling Configuration Settings User and Related Settings P E a8 id ih ES Roles Support Rep Suppor Reps Contact Additional Account Industry Additional Fields Fields Additional Fields ZOHO Corporation 20 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Customer Portal Settings To make your customers gain easy access into SupportCenter Plus application you can customize and design your Customer Portal to sui
357. upport Reps who attend to requests and can create and run custom reports e Contacts who submit service requests into the application SupportCenter Login Username Password C Keep me signed in Login Option Forgot password Note Contacts can log into the application from the Customer Service Portal The user you are logging in as is the main administrator You will be able to access all the modules and features in the application If you have forgotten your password to log into the application all you need to do is click on the Forgot Password link in the login screen Enter the e mail address registered in the application Click Send Request button An e mail is sent to the specified address to reset the password Click on the link specified in the e mail The create new password form appears Enter the New Password in the field provided Retype the password in the Confirm New Password field Click Change A success message appears along with a link to take you back to the login screen 7 Click Back to Login and enter your Username and the new Password to log into the application Note Please note that the support reps and contacts should possess a registered e mail address and a login name In case of contacts apart from the two conditions the contacts should be associated to an account Nr oo i ZOHO Corporation 10 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide
358. ured Service Level Agreement say SLA 1 with Gold Support Plan such that the requests should be responded within 4 hours and resolved within 8 hours Now any requests raised for Acme Inc follows SLA 1 and the due by time is set accordingly To access Service Level Agreement configuration page 1 Click on the Admin tab in the header pane to open the configuration wizard page 2 Click on Service Level Agreement icon PEt under the Contract Settings block The Service Level Agreements list view page opens From this page you can Add Edit Delete and Organize Service Level Agreements Add Service Level Agreement Clicking on the Add New SLA link takes you to the SLA form The SLA form consists of two blocks SLA Details and SLA Rules SLA Details 1 Enter a unique name to identify the SLA in SLA Name field 2 You can also provide a brief Description for the SLA 3 Select the Support Plan from the drop down for which the service level agreement should be applied SLA Rules SLA is applied to requests matching certain criteria Say you want all the requests with Priority as High OR Category as Replacement Queries to be responded within 4 hours and resolved within 8 hours 1 Select the Criteria from the drop down 2 Click Choose button to choose the values from the database for that particular parent criteria Choose the values and click Ok If you have selected the criteria as Priority then select the value
359. us is a web based customer service and support solution that offers Trouble Ticketing Account amp Contact Management SLA Management and Knowledge base all in one package It helps you track and resolve customer issues quickly thereby delivering superior customer support and taking customer satisfaction to the next level SupportCenter Plus Workflow Overview 3rd Party Apps Microsoft Outlook D EI N Account amp Contact Customer Web Portal Management E gt J E mail pew Ticket s Check ech P Phone Workflow Rules Z S il Verify Twitter Customer Contract x SLA Je Forums Reports survey ei Request Closed Support amp em g Ta Representatives Customer enters billing J Ky Customer Respond to acknowledges Contact the resolution with Solution v A Support Rep Customer Interactions lt The two main focus of ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus are e Request Tracking and e Customer Account Management Using the above modules support reps and administrators can resolve complex issues in no time thus reducing end user frustration arising due to time consuming issue resolving process In addition they can also keep track of the changing needs of the customers and modify their services to suit their requirements ZOHO Corporation 7 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Requests Module Helpdesk Support Reps receive requests fr
360. ution Time Entry History Subject Iphone display is not working ZOHO Corporation 111 View Requests by Contact ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide You can view all the requests raised by a contact from the request details page Say you are resolving a request raised by Sharon Harper and would like to view all the request she has raised into SupportCenter Plus application then 1 Click the Request tab in the header pane to open the request list view page 2 Click on the Subject link of the request 3 From the request details page select Actions drop down menu gt View Requests by Contact option All requests raised by Sharon Harper is listed Open Requests by Sharon Harper Showing Open Requests v Subject Assigned To Iphone display is not workin administrator Iphone display is not workin administrator how do i reset the admin passw Iphone display is not working Jake Thomas Jake Thomas Cannot restore the backup data Ruth Hinks Cannot restore the backup data Ruth Hinks Iphone display is not workin administrator Re Request ID 65 I administrator Iphone display is not working Jake Thomas Showing 1 17 of 17 Due By Sep 29 2009 01 55 PM Sep 29 2009 01 18 PM Sep 29 2009 09 32 AM Sep 28 2009 05 35 PM Sep 29 2009 11 26 AM Sep 29 2009 11 26 AM Sep 25 2009 12 16 PM Show 17 v per page Status Date Open Open Open Op
361. utions or a submit a ticket from the customer portal You can customize the content area by add new links or modifying the existing links You can also make available all the public announcements recent solutions and popular solutions to the customer on selecting the corresponding check boxes e Sidebar Sidebar provides options for Login section to customers and also a Registration option for new customers You can also provide options if an approval is required for the new customers from the drop down Further a Search Solutions field can be provided to search for the public solutions and a Sidebar box containing sections To add sections click on Add Section enter the details and Save Portal Color Customization Customize the header content area sidebar and body background with portal color font and size according to your choice To restore to the default color scheme select Restore Default Color Scheme link To preview the customer portal while customizing click Preview Click Apply Changes to apply the changes made ZOHO Corporation 22 Administrator Guide ManageEngine Support Center Plus Home Page The home page for all users of SupportCenter Plus has various useful information displayed that enables an administrator a support rep or a contact to take necessary action Based on the login credentials of the user the following are available in home page Dashboard Log a Call Add New drop down Sear
362. utton The Edit Accounts window pops up where you can perform bulk edit for the fields Industry Account Manager and Time Zone 3 Click Update to save the changes Click Cancel to return to the list view Further you can also edit accounts from the account details page To know more refer Edit Accounts Deleting Account 1 Click on the Accounts tab in the header pane to open the accounts list view page 2 Select the account to be deleted by enabling the check box You can also perform bulk delete by enabling more than one check box 3 Click Delete button A dialog box pops up confirming the delete operation Click OK to proceed You can see the account deleted from the list 5 Click Cancel to retain the account information Alternatively you can also perform the delete operation from the accounts details page To know how refer Delete Accounts Warning 1 When you delete an account the associated contacts will also be deleted from the database vm 2 If request are raised for an account then that account cannot be deleted ZOHO Corporation 186 Assign Unassign Topic Template Using Topics Template you can group specific topics under a template and assign this template to an account Thus restricting the contacts associated to the account to view only solutions pertaining to the topics grouped under the template You can assign specific Topic Template to accounts from the accounts list view pag
363. v Switch to v New Dashboard Ze E Announcements All Business Units GA T Corporate meeting to be held on the 25th and 26th of m September 2010 General orporate meeting to De held on the 25th and 26th of Septembe Aen A webinar to be conducted on helpdesk General A webinar to be conducted on helpdesk Nortel Network will be down due to maintenance from 12PM till 2PM on 24 09 2010 General ortel Network will be down due to maintenance from 12PM till 2Ph Widget Settings Each widget in the dashboard is provided with a settings icon Ry from where the details about the widget can be obtained The settings icon also consists of the following options e Settings The Settings option is available only for the Custom widget and for widgets depicting Time Period pie chart bar diagram and line diagram e Hide this Widget Use Hide this Widget to remove a widget from the dashboard You can enable the widget using Edit Dashboard option e About this Widget About this Widget provides information on the details and purpose of the widget Lets take the pie chart as an example to explore the actions that can be performed on the widgets The pie chart is divided into various sectors illustration each portion with a ZOHO Corporation 355 name and numeric value Hovering over each sector displays the proportion in percentage For instance the widget Requests by Support Reps is a pie chart illustrating the number of r
364. via HTTP method for viewing an account are as follows Parameter Value Description id string Account ID of the account to view account string Name of the account startswith string The first alphabetic letter of the contact businessUnit string Business Unit Output Response Format The output response format for both xml and json consists of three parameters e response uri The response uri is the url value sent over HTTP POST or GET method e status The status denotes the status of the operation Here there are only two status Success and Failure e statuscode The statuscode denotes the code displayed when the status is Success or Failure For a successful operation the status code is 200 Success When the operation is successful the output response format is as given below response uri url value status Success statuscode 200 ZOHO Corporation 329 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide Sample Response response uri api xml getContact status Success statuscode 200 Error Errors occur when the API Key is not valid or the parameter value does not exist in the application In such cases the output format is as shown below response uri url value status Failure statuscode failurecode Sample Response response uri api xml getContact status Failure statuscode 5000 statusmessage The Request ID not found Sample Input Form
365. view Contacts gt Custom Views Custom Views New Custom View Delete E Filter Name Created By IS S Acme Contacts administrator IS Contacts associated to Account administrator 1 1f you are the administrator then you can view all your customized private and public views 2 If you are a support rep then you can add only private custom views Edit Custom Views To edit a custom view Click the edit icon beside the filter name you wish to edit From Edit Custom View page edit the details 3 Click Save You can also add a new custom view by clicking Save and Add New button 1 2 Delete Custom Views To delete custom views 1 Select the check box beside the custom views to be deleted The administrator has the privilege to create and delete public views 2 Click Delete button A pop up window confirming the delete operation appears 3 Click Ok to proceed The Custom View is deleted from the list ZOHO Corporation 197 Customizing Contact List View ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus gives you an option to customize the contacts list view page by including columns of your choice To customize the contacts list view 1 Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the Contacts list view page 2 Click on Column Chooser icon AR The available columns that can be displayed in the list view pops up The columns that are currently visible in the list view is indicated with selected check box
366. w contact editing and deleting contacts From the Contacts List View you can 1 Views Customize the page to display the Contacts using Custom Views option The Contacts is sorted based on the filter criteria you specify while creating the custom view e amp create new custom filter e ZE view edit and delete the filters Contacts gt All Contacts All Contacts w Views d t gt All Contacts Recently Added Contact All A B c D Contacts without Accou 3 New Contact Delete Primary Contacts Unapproved Contacts F Name 4 Registered Contacts O amp Bill Thomas Bob Thomas I mport Accounts Contact from CSV Import relevant data of account and contact information from the existing database as well as from other applications Refer Importing Accounts Contacts from CSV Set the number of Contacts per page and navigation buttons View the entire list of contacts configured in SupportCenter Plus application by settings the number of Contacts to be viewed per page Navigate through the pages using the next and previous navigation buttons ZOHO Corporation 192 1 40f4 Mobile 1234567890 1234567890 925 852 2564 5 Recent Items All the recent items viewed by you is displayed under the Recent Items block You can also navigate back to the pages on clicking on the item link vi Recent Items S Sharon Harper Gj Acme Corporations Resolution for iphon D Maintenan Res
367. w contract is created and list in the Open Contract list ZOHO Corporation 164 Printing Contracts You can print and preview the entire contract content using Print Preview option To print a contract 1 2 ER Click Contracts tab in the header pane to open the contracts list view page Click the Contract Name link of the contract you wish to print From the Contract details page click Print Preview button The contract details is displayed in a printable format Click Ctrl p keys to print the contract details Set the required options and click Ok ZOHO Corporation 165 Accounts ManageEngine SupportCenter Plus allows you to maintain valuable customer information and keep it up to date The account information gives you details of the contacts products and contracts associated to an account Furthermore for accounts with branches in different locations each branch is added as a sub account of the account Thus maintaining information of the branches of an account too Adding each and every account manually and keeping it up to date can be tedious and wearisome Hence SupportCenter Plus provides two easy ways to add your Customer information a Importing from Outlook b Importing from CSV and schedule a CSV import Easy ways to add your Customer information wee a A mport from CSV To enable organizations to quickly populate the customer database SupportCenter Plus provides an easy to use CSV impor
368. wise search of tasks and events based on the parameters listed in the List view To perform a column wise search 1 Click on Activities tab in the header pane 2 From the List View page click on Search icon The search field opens just below every column that is visible in the list view 3 Enter the search string in the column of your choice You can enter keywords in more than one column to perform a combined column search 4 Click Go The search results matching the search string s are displayed All Events Title New Event Delete Team Meeting E Conference Meeting E Conference Meeting E Conference Meeting E Conference Meeting D Conference Meeting E Team Meeting Created on Oct 30 2010 10 52 4M Oct 30 2010 10 52 4M Oct 30 2010 10 52 4M Oct 30 2010 10 52 4M Oct 30 2010 10 52 4M Nov 1 2010 12 41 PM Created by L administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator administrator Start Date Oct 30 2010 11 30 4M Oct 30 2010 11 30 4M Oct 30 2010 11 30 4M Oct 30 2010 11 30 4M Oct 30 2010 11 30 4M Nov 1 2010 04 00 PM 1 60f6 End Date Nov 11 2010 06 00 PM Nov 11 2010 06 00 PM Nov 11 2010 06 00 PM Nov 11 2010 06 00 PM Nov 11 2010 06 00 PM Nov 1 2010 07 00 PM Location Hall Hall Hall Hall Hall conference hall 10 per page ei QE Go 1 The search would return the r
369. xtend evaluation with more support rep contact sales adventnet com If you have already purchased a new license click here to apply 2 week Home Dash weeks Select the number of days after which you want the reminder to be displayed Click Ok The license expiry alert disappears and will be displayed again after the specified time frame If you want the reminder to be available each time you login click on Hide link to temporarily hide the alert If you have a license and want to apply it select click here to apply link The License Info page opens To apply the license refer Registering SupportCenter Plus ZOHO Corporation 26 Dashboard The dashboard of SupportCenter Plus login home displays the following tabs e My View e Support Team My View My View for a support rep displays information on summary of the requests assigned to the logged in user Tasks assigned to the logged in user and the Announcements published company wide Requests Summary e Request Overdue number of requests assigned to the logged in support rep that are overdue e Requests Due Today number of requests assigned to the logged in support rep for that day e Pending Requests number of requests assigned to the logged in support rep that are unresolved Clicking on each link opens the corresponding list view My View Global View Support Team Requests Summary Requests Overdue Over due requests M Requests Due Toda
370. y E aaiae sl ven Ka ke aria ERS pa Requests due to be completed ga Pending Requests Pending requests ZOHO Corporation 27 Requests approaching SLA Violation The number of requests assigned to the logged in support rep that is approaching SLA violation are listed along with the time frame Requests approaching SLA Violation SLA violates in next Es 7137 Unable to restore the bac Business Unit General Assigned To administrator 26mins By 7138 Unable to restore the bac SR j g RSLS FE ease aes A 27mins Business Unit General Assigned To administrator Es 7139 Unable to restore the bac AN f S ee Slee veneer rs 27mins Business Unit General Assigned To administrator En 7140 Unable to restore the bac SUE eh d SR 27mins Business Unit General Assigned To administrator Requests approaching SLA Violation First Response The number of requests assigned to the logged in support rep that is approaching first response time SLA violation are listed along with the time frame Requests approaching SLA Violation First Response SLA violates in next Es 7137 Unable to restore the bac SS i g SE deet 7mins Business Unit General Assigned To administrator Support Team This tab lists all the support reps with login permissions If the support rep is logged in to the application then the login status would be Online else the login status shows Offline The log in
371. y By default this option is enabled irrespective of whether the contact is associated or not associated to an account e All Requests from their Account Primary Contact Contacts can view all the requests raised from their account e All Requests from their Account and sub account Contacts can view all the requests raised from their account and sub accounts 9 If there are any Additional Contact Details then enter the same in the respective fields You can configure Additional Contact Fields in the Admin module 10 You can provide login permission to the Customer Portal on enter the Login Name and Password under Login details block 11 Re enter the password in Re type Password field 12 Specify relevant information about the contact in the Description field 13 Save the details You can send the login details to the contact by enabling Send Self Service login details option in Notifications Rules under the Admin tab Refer Notification Rules to know how to set the notification rules ZOHO Corporation 203 Contact Details Page The details of the contact added by you while creating the contact is displayed under Contacts Details page You can edit delete and view the requests raised by the contact from this page To view the contact details page 1 Click on the Contacts tab in the header pane to open the contacts details page 2 Select the Contact Name link of the contact to be viewed The View Contact Detai
372. y a contact J ohn with the email address john mycompany com sends an email to supportcenter for the first time and the domain mycompany com is already mapped to the account MyCompany Inc then John is automatically associated to MyCompany Inc If the account information is unavailable in the database then SupportCenter Plus automatically adds the account name from the specified domain name in the email address and automatically associate the contact to it You can also exclude certain domains on selecting Excluded Domains link When a contact is automatically associated to an account you can enable email notification to be sent to support reps Select the check box under Notifications Next click Choose button and select the select the support reps from the list Click Ok to populate the selected support reps in the notifications field Active Directory Settings Support Rep information can be imported through Active Directory and to enable AD authentication you need to select the check ZOHO Corporation 298 ManageEngine Support Center Plus Administrator Guide box beside Enable Active Directory Authentication after which the Support Reps can log into SupportCenter Plus application using their AD credentials Furthermore you also have an option to Schedule Active Directory at regular intervals to synchronize the database information with the active directory If there are any modifications in the existing support rep informatio
373. y Added Contact All A B c D E E Contacts without Accou New Contact Delete Reconcile gt Primary Contacts _New Contact gt Unapproved Contacts O Name amp Registered Contacts O SS Kate Hinks O amp Kurt Rusell 3 In the Add Custom View page specify a View Name This field is mandatory 4 If you are the administrator and want this custom view to be available only when you log in select the check box beside Make this view as private custom view The custom view is made private By default the custom view for an administrator is public If you are a support rep without administrator login privilege then by default the created custom view is private The option to Make this view as private custom view is not available 5 In the Advance Filtering block select the criteria to be filtered from Column drop down along with its matching Criteria For instance select Account Name from Column drop down and is from criteria 6 Click on Choose button 7 From Select Column Data pop up choose your option You can select options based on your selected column and criteria 8 Click Add to Filter button to save the filter criteria details The filter criteria is listed in Filter Set block ZOHO Corporation 195 Contacts gt Custom Views Add Custom View Define Custom View View Name Make this as a private custom view Advanced Filtering Account Name v Acme Corporations Choose Add to F

ManageEngine Support Center Plus

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents